Brother MFC-L5710DW Mono Laser Printers User Guide
Brother MFC-L5710DW is a multifunction laser printer designed for home or small office use. It offers printing, copying, scanning and faxing capabilities, along with features like automatic document feeder and duplex printing. The device supports various paper types and sizes, and you can connect it to your computer wirelessly or through a USB cable. With its intuitive touchscreen interface, you can easily navigate through various settings and functions.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Online User's Guide DCP-L5510DW MFC-L5710DN MFC-L5710DW MFC-L5715DN MFC-L6710DW MFC-L6910DN MFC-L6915DN MFC-EX910 © 2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved. Home > Table of Contents Table of Contents Before You Use Your Machine ............................................................................................................. 1 Definitions of Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 2 Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 3 Open Source Licensing.................................................................................................................................. 4 Copyright and License ................................................................................................................................... 5 Important Notes.............................................................................................................................................. 6 Introduction to Your Machine............................................................................................................... 7 Before Using Your Machine ........................................................................................................................... 8 Control Panel Overview ................................................................................................................................. 9 How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD ....................................................................................................... 19 How to Enter Text on Your Machine ............................................................................................................. 20 Set the Main Home Screen .......................................................................................................................... 22 Customisation of Your Machine ................................................................................................................... 23 Access Brother Utilities (Windows) .............................................................................................................. 24 Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) ................................................................................... 25 Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine ............................................................................................. 26 Improve Machine Ventilation ........................................................................................................................ 27 Paper Handling.................................................................................................................................... 29 Load Paper................................................................................................................................................... 30 Load and Print Using the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 31 Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) .................................................................... 39 Paper Settings.............................................................................................................................................. 48 Change the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................ 49 Select the Paper Tray For Printing ..................................................................................................... 50 Change the Check Paper Setting....................................................................................................... 51 Recommended Print Media.......................................................................................................................... 52 Load Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 53 Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ............................................................. 54 Load Documents on the Scanner Glass............................................................................................. 56 Unscannable and Unprintable Areas ........................................................................................................... 57 Using Special Paper..................................................................................................................................... 59 Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 60 Print from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................... 61 Print a Document (Windows).............................................................................................................. 62 Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 64 Secure Print (Windows)...................................................................................................................... 68 Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................... 69 Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation) (Windows) .......................................................................................................................................... 71 Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) .................................................. 72 Print from Your Computer (Mac) .................................................................................................................. 73 Print Using AirPrint ............................................................................................................................. 74 Print an Email Attachment............................................................................................................................ 75 Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive......................................................................................................... 76 Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive ................................................................................................. 78 i Home > Table of Contents Compatible USB Flash Drives ............................................................................................................ 79 Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage ................. 80 Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) ............................................................................... 82 Print Duplicate Copies.................................................................................................................................. 83 Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel ........................................................................................... 84 Cancel a Print Job........................................................................................................................................ 85 Test Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 86 Universal Print.............................................................................................................................................. 87 Universal Print Overview .................................................................................................................... 88 Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management.................................... 89 Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal.................................................................... 90 Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer ................................................................... 91 Print Using Universal Print ................................................................................................................. 92 Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print ................................................................................... 93 Scan...................................................................................................................................................... 94 Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine ............................................................................................ 95 Scan Photos and Graphics................................................................................................................. 96 Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File .................................................................................. 98 Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive....................................................................................... 100 Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) ................................................................................................ 102 Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment .................................................................................. 104 Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient ...................................................................................... 106 Scan to FTP ..................................................................................................................................... 108 Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) ............................................................................................................ 112 Scan to Network (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 119 Scan to SharePoint .......................................................................................................................... 125 Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) .................. 129 Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan .......................................................... 133 Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs ........................................................................................... 134 Disable Scanning from Your Computer ............................................................................................ 136 Scan from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................ 137 Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)............................................................................. 138 Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications....................................... 139 Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan ................................................................................................ 144 Scan from Your Computer (Mac)................................................................................................................ 148 Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management......................................................................... 149 Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management................................................................ 150 Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management .................................................... 151 Copy ................................................................................................................................................... 152 Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided) .................................................................................................. 153 Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)................................................................................................ 158 Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images ............................................................................................................ 160 Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature ................................................................................. 161 Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job ......................................................................................................... 163 Copy an ID Card ........................................................................................................................................ 164 Copy Options ............................................................................................................................................. 166 Fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 169 ii Home > Table of Contents Send a Fax................................................................................................................................................. 170 Send a Fax ....................................................................................................................................... 171 Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF.................................................................................................... 173 Send a Fax Manually........................................................................................................................ 174 Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation ........................................................................................ 175 Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) .................................................... 176 Send a Fax in Real Time .................................................................................................................. 179 Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)................................................................................ 180 Add a Cover Page to Your Fax......................................................................................................... 182 Cancel a Fax in Progress ................................................................................................................. 185 Check and Cancel a Pending Fax.................................................................................................... 186 Fax Options ...................................................................................................................................... 187 Receive a Fax ............................................................................................................................................ 189 Receive Mode Settings .................................................................................................................... 190 Memory Receive Options ................................................................................................................. 200 Remote Fax Retrieval....................................................................................................................... 210 Voice Operations and Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................... 216 Voice Operations .............................................................................................................................. 217 Store Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 219 Set up Broadcasting Groups ............................................................................................................ 223 Combine Address Book Numbers ................................................................................................... 227 Telephone Services and External Devices................................................................................................. 229 Use BT Call Sign .............................................................................................................................. 230 Set the Telephone Line Type............................................................................................................ 232 External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)................................................................................... 234 External and Extension Telephones ................................................................................................. 237 Multi-line Connections (PBX) ........................................................................................................... 244 Fax Reports................................................................................................................................................ 245 Print a Transmission Verification Report .......................................................................................... 246 Print a Fax Journal ........................................................................................................................... 247 PC-FAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 248 PC-FAX for Windows........................................................................................................................ 249 PC-FAX for Mac .............................................................................................................................. 269 Network .............................................................................................................................................. 270 Supported Basic Network Features ........................................................................................................... 271 Configure Network Settings ....................................................................................................................... 272 Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel......................................................................... 273 Wireless Network Settings ......................................................................................................................... 274 Use the Wireless Network ................................................................................................................ 275 Use Wi-Fi Direct® ............................................................................................................................. 288 Enable/Disable Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................... 292 Print the WLAN Report..................................................................................................................... 293 Network Features....................................................................................................................................... 297 Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel................................................. 298 Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management ............................................ 299 Print the Network Configuration Report............................................................................................ 300 Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management .......................................................... 301 iii Home > Table of Contents Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) .......................................................................................................... 302 Use the Send Fax to Server Feature................................................................................................ 323 Configure and Operate LDAP Search .............................................................................................. 327 Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management ..................................... 331 Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) ............................................................................................ 334 Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination.......................................................................... 336 Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings......................................................................... 339 Security .............................................................................................................................................. 340 Before Using Network Security Features ................................................................................................... 341 Disable Unnecessary Protocols ....................................................................................................... 342 Configure Certificates for Device Security ................................................................................................. 343 Supported Security Certificate Features .......................................................................................... 344 How to Create and Install a Certificate............................................................................................. 345 Create a Self-signed Certificate ....................................................................................................... 346 Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) .................................................................................................................................................. 347 Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key ........................................................................... 351 Import and Export a CA Certificate................................................................................................... 354 Manage Multiple Certificates ............................................................................................................ 357 Use SSL/TLS ............................................................................................................................................. 358 Introduction to SSL/TLS ................................................................................................................... 359 Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS............................................................... 362 Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS ...................................................................................... 366 Use SNMPv3.............................................................................................................................................. 368 Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 ............................................................... 369 Use IPsec................................................................................................................................................... 370 Introduction to IPsec......................................................................................................................... 371 Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management ............................................................................ 372 Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management ......................................... 373 Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management ....................................................... 375 Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network ......................................................... 383 What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? .............................................................................................. 384 Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)............................................................................................................ 385 IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods............................................................................................... 387 Use Active Directory Authentication........................................................................................................... 388 Introduction to Active Directory Authentication................................................................................. 389 Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management .................................... 390 Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 392 Use LDAP Authentication........................................................................................................................... 393 Introduction to LDAP Authentication ................................................................................................ 394 Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management .................................................... 395 Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication) ................................................................................................................................. 396 Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 ................................................................................................................... 397 Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0........................................................................................... 398 Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management ............................................ 399 iv Home > Table of Contents Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 ............................................................................................. 400 Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 ...................................................................... 401 Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based Management .................................. 402 Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features................................................................................. 403 Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel ............................................................ 404 Send or Receive an Email Securely........................................................................................................... 405 Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management ......................................... 406 Send an Email with User Authentication .......................................................................................... 407 Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS ....................................................................... 408 Store Print Log to Network ......................................................................................................................... 409 Store Print Log to Network Overview ............................................................................................... 410 Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management ....................... 411 Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting .......................................................... 413 Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0....................................................... 415 Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel .................................................................................... 416 Setting Lock Overview...................................................................................................................... 417 Use Global Network Detection Features.................................................................................................... 422 Enable Global IP Address Detection ................................................................................................ 423 Block Communications from the Global Network ............................................................................. 424 Administrator..................................................................................................................................... 425 Network Features....................................................................................................................................... 426 Security Features ....................................................................................................................................... 427 Network Security .............................................................................................................................. 428 User Authentication .......................................................................................................................... 430 Brother Management Tools ........................................................................................................................ 431 Mobile/Web Connect ......................................................................................................................... 432 Brother Web Connect................................................................................................................................. 433 Brother Web Connect Overview ....................................................................................................... 434 Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect ............................................................................ 436 Set Up Brother Web Connect ........................................................................................................... 438 Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect ............................................................. 446 Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect ......................................................... 447 FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail ........................................................................................................ 449 AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 452 AirPrint Overview.............................................................................................................................. 453 Before Using AirPrint (macOS) ........................................................................................................ 454 Print Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 455 Scan Using AirPrint (macOS) ........................................................................................................... 458 Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)................................................................................................. 459 Mopria™ Print Service and Mopria™ Scan................................................................................................. 460 Brother Mobile Connect ............................................................................................................................. 461 Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader.......................................................................... 462 Brother iPrint&Scan.......................................................................................................................... 463 Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) ............................................................................................. 464 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 465 Error and Maintenance Messages ............................................................................................................. 466 Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes.................................................................................. 472 v Home > Table of Contents Document Jams ......................................................................................................................................... 476 Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit ............................................................................ 477 Document is Jammed under the Document Cover .......................................................................... 478 Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF ...................................................................... 479 Paper Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 480 Clear Paper Jams............................................................................................................................. 481 Paper is Jammed in the MP tray ...................................................................................................... 482 Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 483 Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine .................................................................................. 485 Paper is Jammed inside the Machine .............................................................................................. 487 Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray............................................................................................... 489 Printing Problems....................................................................................................................................... 492 Improve the Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 495 Telephone and Fax Problems .................................................................................................................... 500 Set Dial Tone Detection.................................................................................................................... 503 Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems ............................................. 504 Network Problems...................................................................................................................................... 505 Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 506 Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) ...................................................................... 508 Check Your Machine's Network Settings.......................................................................................... 509 I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration........................................................ 510 My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network ............. 512 I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly ................................................... 514 AirPrint Problems ....................................................................................................................................... 516 Other Problems .......................................................................................................................................... 517 Check the Machine Information ................................................................................................................. 519 Reset Your Machine ................................................................................................................................... 520 Reset Functions Overview ............................................................................................................... 521 Routine Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 522 Replace Supplies ....................................................................................................................................... 523 Replace the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 525 Replace the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 528 Clean the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 531 Clean the Scanner............................................................................................................................ 533 Clean the Touchscreen LCD ............................................................................................................ 535 Clean the Corona Wire..................................................................................................................... 536 Clean the Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................... 538 Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers ...................................................................................................... 541 Check the Remaining Part Life .................................................................................................................. 543 Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together................................................................................. 544 Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................................... 546 Machine Settings............................................................................................................................... 547 Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel ..................................................................................... 548 In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) ............................................................................. 549 General Settings............................................................................................................................... 550 Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut..................................................................................... 567 Print Reports .................................................................................................................................... 572 vi Home > Table of Contents Settings and Features Tables........................................................................................................... 575 Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management ...................................................................... 640 What is Web Based Management? .................................................................................................. 641 Access Web Based Management .................................................................................................... 642 Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management ...................................................... 644 Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management .......................................... 645 Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 646 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 647 Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................... 656 Environmental and Compliance Information .............................................................................................. 658 Information Regarding Recycled Paper ........................................................................................... 659 Availability of Service Parts .............................................................................................................. 660 Chemical Substances (EU REACH)................................................................................................. 661 Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 662 Brother Help and Customer Support.......................................................................................................... 663 vii Home > Before You Use Your Machine Before You Use Your Machine • Definitions of Notes • Trademarks • Open Source Licensing • Copyright and License • Important Notes 1 Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Definitions of Notes Definitions of Notes We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide: WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries. CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality. NOTE NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special conditions of use. Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information. Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock. Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire. Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts. Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform. Bold Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen. Italics Italicised style emphasises an important point or refers you to a related topic. Courier New Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD. Related Information • Before You Use Your Machine 2 Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Trademarks Trademarks Apple, App Store, AirPrint, Mac, macOS, iPadOS, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Nuance and PaperPort are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe®, Reader®, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®. WPA™, WPA2™, WPA3™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®. Android, Google Drive and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC. Use of these trademarks is subject to Google Permissions. Mopria™ and the Mopria™ Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks and service marks of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorised use is strictly prohibited. EVERNOTE is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license. The Bluetooth® word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Brother Industries, Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software Licence Agreement specific to its proprietary programs. Software Trademarks FlashFX® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc. FlashFX® Pro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc. FlashFX® Tera™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc. Reliance™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc. Reliance Nitro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc. Datalight® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc. Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies. Related Information • Before You Use Your Machine 3 Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Open Source Licensing Open Source Licensing This product includes open source software. To view Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright Information, go to your model's Manuals page at support.brother.com/manuals. Related Information • Before You Use Your Machine 4 Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Copyright and License Copyright and License ©2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the following vendors: This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc. Copyright 1989-2020 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved. FlashFX® Copyright 1998-2020 Datalight, Inc. Related Information • Before You Use Your Machine 5 Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Important Notes Important Notes • Check support.brother.com/downloads for Brother driver and software updates. • To keep your machine performance up to date, check support.brother.com/downloads for the latest firmware update. Otherwise, some of your machine's functions may not be available. • Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and power regulations of that country. • Not all models are available in all countries. • Before giving your machine to anyone else, replacing it, or disposing of it, we strongly recommend resetting it to its factory settings to remove all personal information. • Windows 10 in this document represents Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Education, and Windows 10 Enterprise. • Windows 11 in this document represents Windows 11 Home, Windows 11 Pro, Windows 11 Education, and Windows 11 Enterprise. • For macOS v13 Users: This machine supports macOS v13. For machine setup and software installation instructions, see the Quick Setup Guide included in the carton. All features in macOS v11 and macOS v12 are available in the macOS v13 environment and work in a similar way. • The screens or images in this User's Guide are for illustration purposes only and may differ from those of the actual products. • Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows 10. Screens on your computer may vary depending on your operating system. • The contents of this document and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. • Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions. Related Information • Before You Use Your Machine 6 Home > Introduction to Your Machine Introduction to Your Machine • Before Using Your Machine • Control Panel Overview • How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD • How to Enter Text on Your Machine • Set the Main Home Screen • Customisation of Your Machine • Access Brother Utilities (Windows) • Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine • Improve Machine Ventilation 7 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Before Using Your Machine Before Using Your Machine Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following: • Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine. • For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure. Simultaneous printing, scanning, and faxing Your machine can print from your computer while sending or receiving a fax into memory or while scanning a document into the computer. Fax sending will not be stopped during printing from your computer. However, when the machine is copying or receiving a fax on paper, it pauses the printing operation, and then continues printing when copying or fax receiving has finished. DCP models do not support the fax feature. Firewall (Windows) If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, network scan, or PC-FAX, you may need to configure the firewall settings. If you are using the Windows Firewall and you installed the drivers using the steps in the installer, the necessary firewall settings have been already set. If you are using any other personal firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 8 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Control Panel Overview Control Panel Overview >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN The control panel may vary depending on your model. 4 3 1 2 1. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) You can select from two types of screens to set as the Main Home screen: Home screens and Shortcuts screens. When a Home screen is displayed, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the other Home screens. The Main Home screen displays the machine's status when the machine is idle. When displayed, this screen indicates that your machine is ready for the next command. If Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel is locked. The available features vary depending on your model. The Home screens provide access to features, such as Fax, Copy, and Scan. Home screen: Screen 1 9 Home screen: Screen 2 Home screen: Screen 3 Shortcuts screen Create Shortcuts for frequently used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning, and using Web Connect. Eight Shortcuts tabs are available with six Shortcuts on each Shortcuts tab. A total of 48 Shortcuts are available. 10 8 1. Date & Time Displays the date and time set on the machine. 2. Function Icons • [Fax] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Press to access Fax mode. • [Copy] Press to access Copy mode. • [Scan] Press to access Scan mode. • [Secure Print] Press to access the [Secure Print] option. • [Web] Press to connect your machine to an Internet service. • [Apps] Press to connect your machine to the Brother Apps service. • [USB] Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options. • [2 in 1 ID Copy] Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option. 3. (Toner) Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu. 4. (Settings) Press to access the [Settings] menu. 11 If the Setting Lock function has been turned on, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the machine to change the settings. • Toner - Displays the remaining toner life. - Press to access the [Toner] menu. Network • - Press to set up a network connection. - A four level indicator on the screen displays the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless connection. Fax Preview (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) • Press to access the [Fax Preview] menu. • Tray Setting Press to access the [Tray Setting] menu. • Eco Mode Press to access the [Eco Mode] menu. All Settings • Press to access all machine settings. Date & Time • - Displays the date and time set on the machine. - Press to access the [Date & Time] menu. 5. IP Address If the IP Address setting in the Display Information menu has been turned on, your machine's IP Address appears on the Home screens. 12 6. or (Wireless Status) for wireless network models Press to configure the wireless settings. If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength. 0 Max Wireless LAN Disabled (Wired LAN Status) for wired network models Press to configure the Wired LAN settings. The icon displays the current wired network status. 7. [Shortcuts] Press to access the [Shortcuts] screen. 8. (Home screen) Press to access the Home screens. • New Fax (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears at the top of the screen. • Warning Icon 13 The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area to view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen. 2. Touchpanel (Back) Press to go back to the previous menu. (Home) Press to return to the Main Home screen. (Cancel) Press to cancel an operation. 3. LED Power Indicator The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status. Power On/Off 4. • Turn the machine on by pressing . • Turn the machine off by holding down . The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few seconds before the machine turns off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is still available. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 The control panel may vary depending on your model. 1 4 2 5 3 14 1. Near Field Communication (NFC) Reader (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Use card authentication, if applicable, by touching your Integrated Circuit Card (IC Card) to the NFC symbol on the machine. 2. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Access menus and options by pressing them on the touchscreen. Your machine has eight tabbed screens (referred to as Home screens). Each Home screen can hold up to eight icons which can be used for functions, machine settings and shortcuts. A total of 64 icons can be placed on the Home screens as needed. The Main Home screen can be selected from the Home screens. Use the [Admin Settings] menu to group names on the tabs and rearrange the icons. 1. Date & Time Displays the date and time set on the machine. This area is also used to display error or maintenance messages. 2. (Wired LAN Status) Press to configure the Wired LAN settings. The icon displays the current wired network status. Wired LAN Disabled (Grey) Wired LAN Enabled (Blue) No cable connection 15 3. (Wireless Status) Press to configure the wireless settings. For certain models, the Home screens display the wireless status only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength. 0 Max Wireless LAN Disabled 4. (Toner) Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu. 5. (Admin Settings) Press to access the [Admin Settings] menu. If required, enter the password you use to manage this machine in Web Based Management, and then press [OK]. 6. IP Address If the IP Address setting in the Display Information menu has been turned on, your machine's IP Address appears on the Home screens. 7. Function Icons, Setting Icons, and Shortcut Icons The following descriptions explain basic icons and features. The available features vary depending on your model. • [All Settings] Press to access the machine's settings menu. • [Fax] Press to access Fax mode. • [Copy] Press to access Copy mode. • [Scan] Press to access Scan mode. • [Secure Print] Press to access the [Secure Print] option. • [USB] Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options. • [Web] Press to connect your machine to an Internet service. • [Apps] Press to connect your machine to the Brother Apps service. • [2 in 1 ID Copy] Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option. 16 • [Eco Mode] Press to access the [Eco Mode] menu. • (Shortcuts) Press to create Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning, and using Web Connect. 8. Tabs Scroll Buttons Press to display the Home screens. 9. Home Tabs Press to display the screen for the Home. • New Fax When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears at the top of the screen. • Warning icon 17 The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area to view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen. 3. Touchpanel (Back) Press to go back to the previous menu. (Home) Press to return to the Main Home screen. (Cancel) Press to cancel an operation. Power On/Off 4. • Turn the machine on by pressing . • Turn the machine off by holding down . The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few seconds before the machine turns off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is still available. 5. LED Power Indicator The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 18 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, swipe left, right, up, and down, or press d, c, a, or b on the LCD to scroll through them. IMPORTANT DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine. NOTE DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning the machine on. Doing this may cause an error. This product uses fonts owned by ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 19 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Enter Text on Your Machine How to Enter Text on Your Machine • • When you must enter text on your machine, a keyboard appears on the LCD. • The characters that are available may differ depending on your country. • The keyboard layout may differ depending on the operation you perform. • The keyboard display may differ depending on your model. (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Press to cycle between letters, numbers, and special characters. • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Press to select letters, numbers, and special characters. • Press to cycle between lowercase and uppercase letters. • To move the cursor to the left or right, press d or c. Inserting spaces • To enter a space, press [Space] or c. Making corrections • If you entered a character incorrectly and want to change it, press d or c to move the cursor to the incorrect character, and then press . Enter the correct character. • To insert a character, press d or c to move the cursor to the correct place, and then enter the character. • Press for each character you want to erase, or press and hold to erase all the characters. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 20 Related Topics: • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast • Set Your Station ID • Set the Setting Lock Password • Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect • Download and Print Using Web Services 21 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Set the Main Home Screen Set the Main Home Screen Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN You can change the LCD to display a specific Home screen or Shortcut screen. When the machine is idle or you press 1. Press , the touchscreen will return to the screen you set. [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Screen Settings] > [Home Screen]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the screen settings, and then press the setting you want. 3. Press . The LCD displays the screen you selected. You can change this main screen as needed. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 22 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Customisation of Your Machine Customisation of Your Machine Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 The [Admin Settings] menu allows you to rename the Home screens and rearrange the icons. The [Home Screen Settings] menu and the [Other Screen Settings] menu provide the following functions: • Renaming Home screen tabs • Adding, removing, and repositioning icons on Home screens • Setting your Main Home screen • Selecting screen background colour • Selecting whether to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screens • Changing the default functions for the Copy screen and the Scan screen The [Admin Settings] menu allows you to manage permissions and restrictions. The [Restriction Management] menu provides the following functions: • • User Restriction - Secure Function Lock - Active Directory Authentication - LDAP Authentication Setting Lock For more information, see Related Information. Security and Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine Related Topics: • Security • Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel 23 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows) Access Brother Utilities (Windows) Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on your computer. 1. Do one of the following: • (Windows 11) Click • > All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities. (Windows 10) Click > Brother > Brother Utilities. 2. Select your machine. 3. Choose the option you want. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine • Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) 24 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows) > Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows) 1. Do one of the following: • Windows 11 Click • > All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities. Windows 10 Click > Brother > Brother Utilities. 2. Select your model from the drop-down list (if it is not already selected). 3. Click Tools in the left navigation bar. • If the Software Update Notification icon is visible, select it, and then click Check now > Check for Software Updates > Update. Follow the on-screen instructions. • If the Software Update Notification icon is not visible, go to the next step. 4. Click Uninstall in the Tools section of Brother Utilities. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers. Related Information • Access Brother Utilities (Windows) 25 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine The input/output ports are located on the front and back of the machine. 3 1 4 5 6 2 1. LINE socket (For MFC models) 2. EXT. socket (For MFC models) 3. USB accessory port (Front) DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 4. 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port (For network models) 5. USB port 6. USB accessory port (Rear) MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When connecting the USB or network cable, follow the instructions in the software/driver installer. To install the necessary driver and software for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 26 Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Improve Machine Ventilation Improve Machine Ventilation Rotate the main vent cover to redirect the flow of air from inside of the machine. CAUTION • Be careful not to get burned when rotating the vent. It may get hot. • Keep a minimum gap around the product as shown in the illustration. DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN Side Front 11.8 in (300 mm) 5.9 in (150 mm) 5.9 in (150 mm) 5.9 in (150 mm) MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Side Front 11.8 in (300 mm) 4.0 in (100 mm) 5.9 in (150 mm) 5.9 in (150 mm) NOTE DO NOT put the product in a location where any slot or opening is blocked or obstructed. These slots and openings are provided for ventilation. 27 Related Information • Introduction to Your Machine 28 Home > Paper Handling Paper Handling • Load Paper • Paper Settings • Recommended Print Media • Load Documents • Unscannable and Unprintable Areas • Using Special Paper 29 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper Load Paper • Load and Print Using the Paper Tray • Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) 30 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray Load and Print Using the Paper Tray • Load Paper in the Paper Tray • Load and Print Thick Paper Using the Paper Tray • Printing Problems • Error and Maintenance Messages 31 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper Tray Load Paper in the Paper Tray • If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if needed, following the LCD instructions. • When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer. 1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine. 2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper. 32 For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release button (1) in the bottom of the paper tray or the release lever (2) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are not available in some regions.) For trays with a release button: 1 For trays with a release lever: 2 3. Fan the stack of paper well. 4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down. When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related Information: Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray. 5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b). Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams. 6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine. 33 7. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the output tray. Related Information • Load and Print Using the Paper Tray • Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray 34 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper Tray > Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray When you use letterhead or preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings. • DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause the paper to jam or misfeed. • If the print position is misaligned with the letterhead or preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the Print Position setting for the paper tray. • Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type. Orientation For 1-sided printing • face down • top edge towards the front of the paper tray For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding) 1. Press • face up • bottom edge towards the front of the paper tray [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2- sided Feed]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press . Related Information • Load Paper in the Paper Tray 35 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load and Print Thick Paper Using the Paper Tray Load and Print Thick Paper Using the Paper Tray • If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if needed, following the LCD instructions. • When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer. 1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine. 2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper. 36 For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release button (1) in the bottom of the paper tray or the release lever (2) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are not available in some regions.) For trays with a release button: 1 For trays with a release lever: 2 3. Fan the stack of paper well. 4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down. DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause the paper to jam or misfeed. 5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b). Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams. 6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine. 37 7. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray). 8. Open the paper stopper. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 9. Send your print job to the machine. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box. 10. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Close the paper stopper, and then close the back cover. Related Information • Load and Print Using the Paper Tray 38 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) • Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) • Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray • Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray • Printing Problems • Error and Maintenance Messages 39 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer. • Plain Paper • Thin Paper • Thick Paper • Recycled Paper • Bond Paper • Letterhead • Coloured Paper 1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray. 2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently. 40 3. Extend the MP tray support. 4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using. 5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray. 1 • Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1). • When you use letterhead or preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related Information: Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray. Related Information • Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) • Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray 41 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray Change Machine Settings to Print on Letterhead or Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray When you use letterhead or preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings. • DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause the paper to jam or misfeed. • If the print position is misaligned with the letterhead or preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the Print Position setting for the MP tray. • Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type. Orientation For 1-sided printing • face up • top edge first For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding) 1. Press • face down • bottom edge first [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2- sided Feed]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press . Related Information • Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) 42 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray When you print on labels, open the back cover (face up output tray) and use the MP tray. When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer. 1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray). 2. Open the paper stopper. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently. 43 4. Extend the MP tray support. 5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the labels you are using. 6. Load labels with the printing surface face up in the MP tray. 1 Make sure the labels are below the maximum paper mark (1). 7. Change your print preferences in the Print screen. 8. Send your print job to the machine. 9. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Close the paper stopper, and then close the back cover. Related Information • Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) 44 Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible. When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer. 1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray). 2. Open the paper stopper. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently. 45 4. Extend the MP tray support. 5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using. 6. Load envelopes with the printing surface face up in the MP tray. 1 Load the envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are below the maximum paper mark (1). 7. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box. Settings Options for Envelopes Paper Size Com-10 DL C5 Monarch Media Type Envelopes Env. Thick Env. Thin 8. Send your print job to the machine. 46 9. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Close the paper stopper, and then close the back cover. Related Information • Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) 47 Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings Paper Settings • Change the Paper Size and Paper Type • Select the Paper Tray For Printing • Change the Check Paper Setting 48 Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type Change the Paper Size and Paper Type When you change the size and type of paper you load in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings on the LCD. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper Type]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the option you want. 3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want. . 4. Press 5. Press [Paper Size]. 6. Press the option you want. 7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want. 8. Press . Related Information • Paper Settings 49 Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Select the Paper Tray For Printing Select the Paper Tray For Printing Change the machine's default paper tray for printing copies, received faxes, and print jobs from your computer. DCP models do not support the fax feature. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Tray Use: Copy], [Tray Use: Fax], or [Tray Use: Print] option, and then press the option you want. 3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the option you want, and then press it. For example, when you select the [MP>T1] option, the machine pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, and then from Tray 1. 4. Press . • When you make a copy using the ADF and give priority to multiple trays, the machine looks for the tray with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray. • When you make a copy using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray. • (For models with facsimile function) Use the following sizes of paper for printing faxes: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal, or India Legal. When an appropriate size is not in any of the trays, the machine stores received faxes and [Size Mismatch] appears on the touchscreen. • (For models with facsimile function) If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s memory, [No Paper] appears on the touchscreen. Load paper in the empty tray. Related Information • Paper Settings 50 Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Setting Change the Check Paper Setting When the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, or load paper in the MP tray, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type. The default setting is On. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check Paper]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • Paper Settings 51 Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media Recommended Print Media To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table. Paper Type Item Plain Paper Xerox Premier TCF 80 g/m2 Xerox Business 80 g/m2 Recycled Paper Steinbeis Evolution White 80 g/m2 Labels Avery laser label L7163 Envelopes Antalis River series (DL) Related Information • Paper Handling 52 Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents Load Documents You can send a fax, make copies, and scan from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) and from the scanner glass. • Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) • Load Documents on the Scanner Glass 53 Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Use the ADF when copying or scanning multi page, standard-sized documents. • The ADF can hold the following sheets and feed each sheet individually: - (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Up to 50 sheets - (MFC-L6710DW) Up to 70 sheets - (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Up to 80 sheets • Use standard 80 g/m2 paper. • Make sure documents with correction fluid or written in ink are completely dry. IMPORTANT • DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam. • DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, glued together, or taped. • DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper, or fabric. • To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding. Supported Document Sizes Length: 147.3 to 355.6 mm Width: 105 to 215.9 mm Weight: 64 to 90 g/m2 1. Unfold the ADF document output support flap. 2. Fan the pages well. 3. Stagger the pages of your document and load it into the ADF face up and top edge first, as shown in the illustration. 4. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document. 54 Related Information • Load Documents 55 Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents on the Scanner Glass Load Documents on the Scanner Glass Use the scanner glass to fax, copy, or scan one page at a time. Supported Document Sizes • Length: (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Up to 300 mm • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Up to 355.6 mm Width: Up to 216 mm Weight: Up to 2kg To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty. 1. Lift the document cover. 2. Place the document on the scanner glass face down. 3. Place the corner of the page in the upper left corner of the scanner glass. 4. Close the document cover. If the document is a book or is thick, gently press on the document cover. Related Information • Load Documents 56 Home > Paper Handling > Unscannable and Unprintable Areas Unscannable and Unprintable Areas The measurements in the table below show the maximum unscannable and unprintable areas from the edges of the most commonly-used paper sizes. These measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the application you are using. 1 2 4 3 Do not attempt to scan, copy, or print in these areas. Any content included in such areas will not be reflected in the output. Usage Fax (Sending) Document Size Top (1) Left (2) Bottom (3) Right (4) Letter, Legal 3.0 mm 4.0 mm A4 3.0 mm (ADF) 1.0 mm (Scanner Glass) 3.0 mm Copy 1 Scan Letter, Legal 4.0 mm 4.0 mm A4 4.0 mm 3.0 mm Letter (ADF) (ADF) 3.0 mm 3.0 mm (Scanner Glass) (Scanner Glass) 3.0 mm 2 3.0 mm 2 (ADF) (ADF) 3.0 mm 3.0 mm (Scanner Glass) (Scanner Glass) 3.0 mm 2 3.0 mm 2 (ADF) (ADF) 3.0 mm 3.0 mm (Scanner Glass) (Scanner Glass) 3.0 mm 2 3.0 mm 2 Letter, Legal 4.2 mm 4.2 mm A4 4.2 mm 4.2 mm A4 Legal Print 1 A 1 in 1 copy and 100% document size copy 2 This number is adjustable to 0 mm depending on your model. If the number is set to 0 mm, a black shadow may appear around the edges on the scanned image. 57 Related Information • Paper Handling 58 Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper Using Special Paper Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance. • DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine. • If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit degraded performance. Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct sunlight, and heat. IMPORTANT Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine. DO NOT use paper: • that is highly textured • that is extremely smooth or shiny • that is curled or warped • that is coated or has a chemical finish • that is damaged, creased, or folded • that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide • with tabs and staples • with letterhead using low temperature dyes or thermography • that is multipart or carbonless • that is designed for inkjet printing If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement. Related Information • Paper Handling 59 Home > Print Print • Print from Your Computer (Windows) • Print from Your Computer (Mac) • Print an Email Attachment • Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive • Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive • Print Duplicate Copies • Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel • Cancel a Print Job • Test Print • Universal Print 60 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) Print from Your Computer (Windows) • Print a Document (Windows) • Print Settings (Windows) • Secure Print (Windows) • Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) • Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation) (Windows) • Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) 61 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document (Windows) Print a Document (Windows) 1. Select the print command in your application. 2. Select your model's name, and then click the printing properties or preferences button. The printer driver window appears. 3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray. 4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size. 5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout. If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application. 6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field. 7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using. 8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets, click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options. 9. Change other printer settings, if needed. 10. Click OK. 11. Complete your print operation. Related Information • Print from Your Computer (Windows) 62 Related Topics: • Print Settings (Windows) 63 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print Settings (Windows) Print Settings (Windows) >> Basic Tab >> Advanced Tab Basic Tab 1. Paper Size Select the paper size you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a custom paper size. 2. Orientation Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout. If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application. 3. Copies Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field. Collate Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed. 4. Media Type Select the media type you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts its print settings according to the selected media type. 64 5. Resolution Select the print resolution. As print resolution and speed are related, the higher the resolution, the longer it will take to print the document. 6. Print Settings Select the type of document you want to print. Manual Settings... Specify additional settings such as brightness, contrast, and other settings. Graphics Use Printer Halftone Select this option to use the printer driver to express halftones. Brightness Adjust the brightness. Contrast Adjust the contrast. Graphics Quality Select either Graphics or Text for the best print quality, based on the type of document you are printing. Improve Grey Printing Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas. Improve Pattern Printing Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the fills and patterns you see on your computer screen. Improve Thin Line Select this option to improve the image quality of thin lines. Use System Halftone Select this option to use Windows to express halftones. TrueType Mode (available for certain models) Mode Select how the fonts are processed for printing. Use Printer TrueType Fonts Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing. 7. Multiple Page Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper, or print one page of your document on multiple sheets. Page Order Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. Border Line Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. 8. 2-sided / Booklet Select this option to print on both sides of the paper, or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided printing. 2-sided Settings Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each orientation. 65 9. Paper Source Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose. First Page Select the paper source to use for printing the first page. Other Pages Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages. Advanced Tab 1. Scaling Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document. Fit to Paper Size Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list. Free [25 - 400%] Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a value into the field. 2. Reverse Print Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees. 3. Use Watermark Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created. 4. Header-Footer Print Select this option to print the date, time, and login user name on the document. 66 5. Toner Save Mode Select this feature to use less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are still legible. 6. Secure Print (available for certain models) This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents are not printed out until you enter a password on the machine's control panel. 7. Administrator This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions. 8. User Authentication (available for certain models) This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user. 9. Other Print Options Sleep Time Select this option to set the machine to enter sleep mode immediately after printing. Macro (available for certain models) Select this feature to print an electronic form (macro), which you have stored in your machine's memory, as an overlay on the print job. Density Adjustment Specify the print density. Improve Print Output Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing. Skip Blank Page Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from printing. Print Text in Black Select this option when you want to print colour text in black. Print Archive Select this option to save the print data as a PDF file to your computer. Eco settings Select this option to reduce printing noise. Related Information • Print from Your Computer (Windows) Related Topics: • Print a Document (Windows) 67 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Secure Print (Windows) Secure Print (Windows) Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on the machine's control panel. The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn the machine off. 1. Select the print command in your application. 2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button. The printer driver window appears. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field. 5. Select the Secure Print checkbox. 6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field. 7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed. 8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window. 9. Click OK. 10. Complete your print operation. 11. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option, and then press it. 12. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name. 13. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK]. 14. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it. 15. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK]. 16. Press [Start]. The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing. Related Information • Print from Your Computer (Windows) 68 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) When you change an application's print settings, the changes apply only to documents printed with that application. To change print settings for all Windows applications, you must configure the printer driver properties. 1. Do one of the following: • For Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. • For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices and printers. • For Windows Server 2012 R2 Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. • For Windows Server 2012 Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings, and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. 2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If the printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.) The printer properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences... or Preferences... button. The printer driver dialog box appears. • To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab (available for certain models). • To change the printer port, click the Ports tab. 4. Select the print settings you want to use as default for all of your Windows programs. 5. Click OK. 6. Close the printer properties dialog box. Related Information • Print from Your Computer (Windows) • Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows) 69 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) > Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows) Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows) Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and check the machine's serial number. The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps: 1. Do one of the following: • For Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. • For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices and printers. • For Windows Server 2012 R2 Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. • For Windows Server 2012 Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings, and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. 2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties. (If the printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.) The printer properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Click the Auto Detect button. The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected. 5. Click the Apply button. 6. Close the printer properties dialog box. The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions: • The machine is turned off. • The machine is shared via a Print Server. • The machine and your computer are not connected. Related Information • Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) 70 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation) (Windows) Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation) (Windows) The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript® data more clearly. Go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads to install the PS driver (BR-Script3 printer driver). 1. Select the print command in your application. 2. Select your model with BR-Script3 in the name, and then click the printing properties or preferences button. The printer driver window appears. 3. Click the Layout, Paper/Quality, or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings. (available for certain models) Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced... button to change advanced print settings. Click OK. 4. Click OK. 5. Complete your print operation. Related Information • Print from Your Computer (Windows) 71 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) The Status Monitor is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more machines, allowing you to get immediate notification of errors. Do one of the following: - Double-click the - Launch icon in the task tray. (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model's name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor. Troubleshooting Click the Troubleshooting button to access the support website. Looking for replacement supplies? Click the Looking for replacement supplies? button for more information on Brother genuine supplies. Related Information • Print from Your Computer (Windows) Related Topics: • Printing Problems 72 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) Print from Your Computer (Mac) • Print Using AirPrint 73 Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print Using AirPrint Print Using AirPrint • Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch • Print Using AirPrint (macOS) 74 Home > Print > Print an Email Attachment Print an Email Attachment You can print files by emailing them to your Brother machine. • Make sure Web Based Management is set to On. For more information, see Related Information. • You can attach up to 10 documents, 20 MB in total, to an email. • This feature supports the following formats: • - Document files: PDF, TXT, and Microsoft Office files - Image files: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, and TIFF The machine prints both the email content and attachments by default. To print only email attachments, change the settings as necessary. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Online Functions > Online Functions Settings. • Start from • If this function is locked, contact your network administrator for access. , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click the I accept the terms and conditions button. 6. Go to your machine, and then follow the machine's instructions to enable the settings. 7. On your computer, click General Settings. The Email Print: General Settings screen appears. 8. Click the Enable button. The machine prints the instruction sheet. 9. Send your email to the email address included on the sheet. The machine prints the email attachments. • To change the settings, including email address and printer settings, click the Online Functions Settings Page button. • You can also configure the settings from your machine. Press [Apps] > [Online Functions], and then follow the on-screen instructions. Related Information • Print Related Topics: • Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel 75 Home > Print > Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 USB Storage Print allows you to save secure print data to the USB flash drive and print them later by entering a password on the machine's control panel. NOTE USB flash drive requirements: • Storage Size: 1 GB or more (Recommended: 16 GB or more) • Format: FAT32/exFAT • Data stored on a USB flash drive is encrypted, but this may not protect it from unauthorised access in all circumstances. Make sure you securely manage and store your data and USB flash drive. • Data on a USB flash drive can only be read on the machine whose data it stores. You cannot read the data on another machine, device, or computer. • When you no longer need the USB flash drive to store the data from your machine and want to use it for other purposes, delete all stored data, and format the USB flash drive on your computer. To format or clean the USB flash drive, refer to its user manual for instructions. For more information on the printer driver settings, see Related Information. 1. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port (Rear). 2. Press . 3. On the machine's control panel, press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Job Save Location]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 4. Press [USB flash drive(Rear port)]. A message appears on the LCD to initialise the USB flash drive. NOTE When you change the location where you save print jobs, all the stored job, Macro, Stream and Font data in the machine's memory will be deleted. 5. Press and hold [OK] for two seconds to initialise. The machine will restart to activate the USB Storage Print feature. 76 NOTE When the machine restarts to activate the USB Storage Print feature, the Macro, Stream and Font data will be deleted from the USB flash drive. 6. In the printer driver, complete the settings for the Secure Print option and execute the print command in your application. 7. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option, and then press it. 8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name. 9. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK]. 10. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it. 11. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK]. 12. Press [Start]. The machine prints the data and deletes the print job from the USB flash drive. IMPORTANT DO NOT remove the USB flash drive from the USB port (Rear) until the machine has finished printing. Related Information • Print Related Topics: • Error and Maintenance Messages 77 Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive You can print photos directly from a digital camera or a USB flash drive. Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN. • Compatible USB Flash Drives • Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage • Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) 78 Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Compatible USB Flash Drives Compatible USB Flash Drives IMPORTANT The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives and digital cameras that use the USB mass storage standard. Other USB devices are not supported. Compatible USB Flash Drives USB Class USB Mass Storage Class USB Mass Storage Sub Class SCSI or SFF-8070i Transfer Protocol Bulk transfer Only Format 1 FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT Sector Size Max. 4096 Byte Encryption Encrypted devices are not supported. 1 NTFS format is not supported. Related Information • Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive 79 Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage • Make sure your digital camera is turned on. • Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to Mass Storage mode. IMPORTANT To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. USB Port Location (Front View) USB Port Location (Rear View) The rear view illustration shows the MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910. 1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface. The touchscreen will automatically display the USB menu to confirm that the USB flash drive or digital camera is correctly connected. 80 • If an error occurs, the USB menu will not appear on the touchscreen. • When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the touchscreen does not display any information even if you connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press the touchscreen to wake up the machine. • If your machine's Secure Function Lock is On, you may not be able to print from a USB flash drive or digital camera. • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) If the machine prompts you to choose the USB port, select it on the touchscreen. 2. Press [Direct Print]. 3. Swipe up or down, or press a or b to display the file you want to print, and then select the file. To print an index of the files stored on the USB flash drive or digital camera, press [Index Print] on the touchscreen. Press [Yes] to print the data. 4. Do one of the following: • To change the settings, press [Print Settings]. Go to the next step. • If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Start]. 5. Select the print settings you want to change: • [Print Quality] • [Tray Use] • [Paper Type] • [Paper Size] • [Multiple Page] • [Orientation] • [2-sided] • [Collate] • [PDF Print Options] • [PDF Fit to Page] Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Enter the number of copies you want. 8. Press [Start] to print the data. 9. Press . IMPORTANT DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine has finished printing. Related Information • Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive 81 Home > Print > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system. 1. Select the print command in your application. 2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option. 3. Complete your print operation. 4. Enter the required information to save the file. If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn). If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive. Related Information • Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive 82 Home > Print > Print Duplicate Copies Print Duplicate Copies Use the Carbon Copy function to make multiple copies of the same print data, as if printing on carbon paper. Send the data to individual paper trays that you loaded with different paper types or colours. For example, you may want to set the machine to send your print data to Tray 1, which you have pre-loaded with blue coloured paper, and then reprint the data in a certain location on the page from the MP Tray, which you have loaded with yellow coloured paper that already contains text. If you load blue paper in Tray 1 and yellow paper in the MP tray, the printer will automatically feed paper for Sheet 1 from Tray 1 and Sheet 2 from the MP Tray. If you enable the Carbon Copy function, the machine will always make copies automatically. Windows The Carbon Copy function also allows you to select a different printing macro/stream for each page. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Carbon Menu] > [Carbon Copy] > [On]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copies] option, and then press the [Copies] option. 3. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK]. 4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press the [Copy1 Tray] option. 5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray you want to configure for the [Copy1 Stream] option, and then press to select the paper tray. Windows a. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Macro] option, and then press it. b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the ID number of the macro you want to use, and then press it. 6. Repeat these steps until you have selected all the tray settings for each copy. 7. Press . 8. Send your print job to the machine. Related Information • Print 83 Home > Print > Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel Change Print Settings Using the Control Panel Select the type of document you want to print. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Settings]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Text] or [Graphics]. 3. Press . Related Information • Print 84 Home > Print > Cancel a Print Job Cancel a Print Job Press . To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold for about four seconds. Related Information • Print Related Topics: • Printing Problems 85 Home > Print > Test Print Test Print If there are problems with print quality, follow these instructions to do a test print: 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Options] > [Test Print]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Yes]. 3. Press . Related Information • Print Related Topics: • Improve the Print Quality 86 Home > Print > Universal Print Universal Print • Universal Print Overview • Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management • Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal • Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer • Print Using Universal Print • Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print 87 Home > Print > Universal Print > Universal Print Overview Universal Print Overview Universal Print is a cloud-based print service from Microsoft. You can print documents, from anywhere on the Internet, without installing a printer driver. Universal Print is available for Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) users with a Microsoft 365 subscription. 1. Computer running Windows 10 20H1 or greater 2. Cloud server Related Information • Universal Print 88 Home > Print > Universal Print > Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management • Make sure you set the correct date and time for your time zone. • If your network uses a proxy server, configure the proxy server settings. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the Universal Print checkbox, and then click Advanced Settings. 6. Change your machine's name in the Device Name field if necessary. Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. 7. Click Register. If an error occurs, follow the on-screen instructions. 8. A Universal Print user code appears. Click the Sign in button, and then type the user code. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the registration. Related Information • Universal Print Related Topics: • Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management • Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management 89 Home > Print > Universal Print > Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal You can assign users to the Universal Print service only if your machine is registered on the Microsoft Azure portal. 1. Access the Microsoft Azure portal. URL: portal.azure.com 2. Log in as a Printer Administrator. 3. Select the Universal Print service. 4. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list. 5. Select the Share option. 6. Select the users you want to assign to the Universal Print service, and then click Share Printer. Related Information • Universal Print 90 Home > Print > Universal Print > Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer 1. Click > > Devices > Printers & scanners > Add a printer or scanner. 2. Select your machine registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer from the list, and then click Add device. Related Information • Universal Print 91 Home > Print > Universal Print > Print Using Universal Print Print Using Universal Print 1. Select the print command in your application. 2. Select the machine you registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button. 3. Change the printer settings, if needed. 4. Complete your print operation. Related Information • Universal Print 92 Home > Print > Universal Print > Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print To deregister your machine, you must delete it from Web Based Management, and then delete it on the Microsoft Azure portal. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Next to the Universal Print checkbox, click Advanced Settings. 6. Click Delete Registration Data, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 7. Access the Microsoft Azure portal. URL: portal.azure.com 8. Log in as a Printer Administrator. 9. Select the Universal Print service. 10. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list. 11. Click Delete Printer Share. 12. Click Unregister. Related Information • Universal Print 93 Home > Scan Scan • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine • Scan from Your Computer (Windows) • Scan from Your Computer (Mac) • Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management 94 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine • Scan Photos and Graphics • Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File • Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive • Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) • Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment • Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient • Scan to FTP • Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) • Scan to Network (Windows) • Scan to SharePoint • Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) • Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan • Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs • Disable Scanning from Your Computer 95 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan Photos and Graphics Scan Photos and Graphics Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer. Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to Image]. 3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data. If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press [OK]. 4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step. • [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • [Scan Settings] • [Colour Setting] • [Resolution] • [File Type] • [Document Size] • [Brightness] • [Contrast] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Auto Deskew] • [Skip Blank Page] • [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity] • [Remove Background Colour] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models) • [B&W TIFF Compress] 96 • To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine. • If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK]. • To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut]. 5. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 97 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files. Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to File]. 3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data. If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press [OK]. 4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step. • [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • [Scan Settings] • [Colour Setting] • [Resolution] • [File Type] • [Document Size] • [Brightness] • [Contrast] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Auto Deskew] • [Skip Blank Page] • [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity] • [Remove Background Colour] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models) • [B&W TIFF Compress] 98 • To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine. • If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK]. • To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut]. 5. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 99 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive Scan documents directly to a USB flash drive. 1. Load your document. 2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine. 3. Press [Scan to USB]. 4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step. • [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • [Colour Setting] • [Resolution] • [File Type] • [Document Size] • [Brightness] • [Contrast] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [File Name] • [File Name Style] • [File Size] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Auto Crop] • [Auto Deskew] • [Skip Blank Page] • [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity] • [Remove Background Colour] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models) • [Document Separation] • [B&W TIFF Compress] • If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK]. • To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default] option, and then press [Yes]. • To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes]. • To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut]. 5. Press [Start]. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) If the machine prompts you to select the USB host, make your selection. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. 100 IMPORTANT The LCD displays a message while reading the data. DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the USB flash drive from the machine while it is reading the data. You could lose your data or damage the USB flash drive. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 101 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using the optical character recognition (OCR) technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application. • The Scan to OCR feature is available only for certain languages. • Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to OCR]. 3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data. If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press [OK]. 4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step. • [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • [Scan Settings] • [Colour Setting] • [Resolution] • [File Type] • [Document Size] • [Brightness] • [Contrast] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Auto Deskew] • [Skip Blank Page] • [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity] • [Remove Background Colour] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Margin Settings](available only for certain models) 102 • To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine. • If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK]. • To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut]. 5. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 103 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment Send the scanned data from your machine to your email application as an attachment. • Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan. • To use this feature with your machine's Scan button, make sure you select one of these applications in Brother iPrint&Scan: - Windows: Microsoft Outlook - Mac: Apple Mail For other applications and Webmail services, use the Scan to Image or Scan to File feature to scan a document, and then attach the scanned file to an email message. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to E-mail]. 3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data. If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press [OK]. 4. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step. • [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • [Scan Settings] • [Colour Setting] • [Resolution] • [File Type] • [Document Size] • [Brightness] • [Contrast] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Auto Deskew] • [Skip Blank Page] 104 • [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity] • [Remove Background Colour] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models) • [B&W TIFF Compress] • To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine. • If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK]. • To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut]. 5. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 105 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient Send scanned data directly from your machine to an email recipient without using a computer. This function allows your machine to scan documents and send them to an email address without your machine being connected to a computer. To send the scanned data as an attachment directly to your default email application using the iPrint&Scan software on your computer or the Scan button on your machine, use the "Scan to Email Attachment" function instead. • To send scanned data to an email recipient, you must configure your machine to communicate with your network and email server, which is used to send and receive emails. • Configure these items from the machine's control panel or Web Based Management. • To use the Scan to Email Server function, connect your machine to the network and access an SMTP server. Set up the following SMTP email settings: - Server address - Port number - User name - Encryption type (SSL or TLS) - Email server certificate (if used) If you do not know these settings, contact your email service provider or network administrator. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to E-mail Server]. • If you registered your email address with your user ID, the [to My E-mail] option appears when you log on to the machine using Secure Function Lock, Active Directory Authentication, or LDAP Authentication. • To send scanned data to your email address, press [to My E-mail]. When your email address appears on the LCD, press [Next]. • To enable this feature in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to E-mail Server. In the Send to My E-mail field, select On. Click Submit. 3. Do one of the following to enter the destination email address: • To enter the email address manually, press [Manual], and then enter the email address using the keyboard on the LCD. When finished, press [OK]. • If the email address is stored in the machine's address book, press [Address Book], and then select the email address. Press [OK]. 4. Confirm the email address, and then press [Next]. 5. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change.(DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step. • [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • [Colour Setting] • [Resolution] • [File Type] • [Document Size] • [Brightness] • [Contrast] 106 (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [File Name] • [File Name Style] • [File Size] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Auto Deskew] • [Skip Blank Page] • [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity] • [Remove Background Colour] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options) • [Margin Settings] (available only for certain models) • [Document Separation] • [B&W TIFF Compress] • If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK]. • To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default] option, and then press [Yes]. • To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes]. • To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut]. (This function may not be available depending on your machine conditions.) 6. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 107 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to an FTP server when you need to share the scanned information. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to FTP destinations. • Set up a Scan to FTP Profile • Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server 108 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP > Set up a Scan to FTP Profile Set up a Scan to FTP Profile Set up a Scan to FTP Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to an FTP location. • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the FTP option, and then click Submit. 6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu. 7. Select the profile you want to set up or change. Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189). Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default setting is port 21. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the FTP server. Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to scan securely using SSL/TLS communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed. Store Directory Type the path to the folder on the FTP server where you want to send your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (see example). 109 Option Description File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example: "Estimate_098765.pdf"). Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Size Select your file size from the list. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned. Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results. Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data. The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages. 2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original. Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed. Margin Settings (available only for certain models) Adjust your document's margins. Document Separation Split a scanned image. When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function. B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document. Brightness Select the brightness level. Contrast Select the contrast level. Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. 8. Click Submit. Related Information • Scan to FTP 110 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP > Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server Share scanned information by saving it to your FTP server. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP]. 3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information. 4. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan to FTP 111 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) Uses the Secure Shell Protocol to establish a private and safe data stream when scanning documents to a network destination. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SFTP destinations. • Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile • Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management • Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management • Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management • Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server 112 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to an SFTP location. • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the SFTP option, and then click Submit. 6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu. 7. Select the profile you want to set up or change. Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189). Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the SFTP server. Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key. Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the authentication type. Server Public Key Select the authentication type. Store Directory Type the path to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to send your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (see example). 113 Option Description File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example: "Estimate_098765.pdf"). Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Size Select your file size from the list. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned. Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results. Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data. The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages. 2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original. Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed. Margin Settings (available only for certain models) Adjust your document's margins. Document Separation Split a scanned image. When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function. B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document. Brightness Select the brightness level. Contrast Select the contrast level. Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. 8. Click Submit. Related Information • Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) 114 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Create New Client Key Pair. 6. In the Client Key Pair Name field, type the name (up to 20 characters) you want. 7. Click the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list, and then select the algorithm you want. 8. Click Submit. The client key pair is created and saved in your machine's memory. The client key pair name and public key algorithm will be displayed in the Client Key Pair List. Related Information • Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) 115 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Export Public Key shown with Client Key Pair List. 6. Click Submit. 7. Specify the location where you want to save the file. The client key pair is exported to your computer. Related Information • Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) 116 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Server Public Key. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Import Server Public Key. 6. Specify the file that you want to import. 7. Click Submit. The server public key is imported to your machine. Related Information • Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) 117 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) > Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP]. 3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information. 4. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan to SSH Server (SFTP) 118 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) Scan to Network (Windows) Scan documents directly to a CIFS server on your local network. For added convenience, you can configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to Network destinations. • Set up a Scan to Network Profile • Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server 119 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set up a Scan to Network Profile Set up a Scan to Network Profile Set up a Scan to Network Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to a folder on a CIFS server. • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the Network option, and then click Submit. If you want to send the data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, select On for the Send to My Folder option. 6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu. 7. Select the profile you want to set up or change. Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to send your scanned data. File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example: "Estimate_098765.pdf"). Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. 120 Option Description Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Size Select your file size from the list. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned. Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results. Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data. The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages. 2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original. Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed. Margin Settings (available only for certain models) Adjust your document's margins. Document Separation Split a scanned image. When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function. B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document. Brightness Select the brightness level. Contrast Select the contrast level. Use PIN for Authentication To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN Code field. Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles: • user@domain • domain\user Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Kerberos Server Address To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters). 8. Click Submit. 9. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) or set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for all authentication methods. The machine's time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server. Related Information • Scan to Network (Windows) • Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management 121 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set up a Scan to Network Profile > Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management Make sure the date and time and the time zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the control panel. The machine's time must match the time used by the server providing authentication. • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS • Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. • Ignore step 1, if you already have a Web Based Management window open. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 122 5. Clear the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox. 6. In the Date fields, enter the date. 7. Select the clock type from the Clock Type field. 8. In the Time fields, enter the time. 9. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For example, the time zone for Eastern time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00. 10. In the Auto Daylight field, click On to set the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time. It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn (available only for some countries). 11. Click Submit. Related Information • Set up a Scan to Network Profile 123 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to Network]. • If you registered your user ID, the [to My Folder] option appears when you log on to the machine using Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication. • To send scanned data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, press [to My Folder]. • To enable this feature in Web Based Management, click the Scan tab, and then click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar. In the Send to My Folder field, select On. Click Submit. 3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information. If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press [OK]. 4. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan to Network (Windows) 124 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint Scan to SharePoint Scan documents directly to a SharePoint server when you need to share the scanned information. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SharePoint destinations. • Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile • Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server 125 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to a SharePoint location. • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the SharePoint option, and then click Submit. 6. Click the Scan to FTP / SFTP / Network / SharePoint Profile menu. 7. Select the profile you want to set up or change. NOTE Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared %20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx). SSL/TLS If you enter the address starting from "https://" in the SharePoint Site Address field, you can verify the server certificate by checking the Verify Server Certificate check. File Name Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example: "Estimate_098765.pdf"). Quality Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. 126 Option Description File Type Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Document Size Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. File Size Select your file size from the list. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile. Auto Deskew Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned. Skip Blank Page Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results. Skip Blank Page Sensitivity Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data. The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages. 2-sided Scan (MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original. Remove Background Colour Change the amount of background colour that is removed. Margin Settings (available only for certain models) Adjust your document's margins. Document Separation Split a scanned image. When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function. B&W TIFF Compress Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document. Brightness Select the brightness level. Contrast Select the contrast level. Use PIN for Authentication To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN Code field. Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected automatically. Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles: • user@domain • domain\user Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Kerberos Server Address To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters). 8. Click Submit. Related Information • Scan to SharePoint 127 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [to SharePoint]. 3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information. If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press [OK] 4. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job. Related Information • Scan to SharePoint 128 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) The Web Services protocol enables Windows 10 and Windows 11 users to scan using a Brother machine on the network. You must install the driver via Web Services. • Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows 10 and Windows 11) • Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11) • Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol 129 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows 10 and Windows 11) Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows 10 and Windows 11) • Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine. • Verify that the host computer and the Brother machine are on the same subnet, or that the router is correctly configured to pass data between the two devices. • You must configure the IP address on your Brother machine before you configure this setting. 1. Do one of the following: • Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device. • Windows 10 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device. • The Web Services Name for the Brother machine is your model's name and the MAC Address. • Move your mouse over the machine's name to display the machine's information. 2. Select the machine you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To uninstall the drivers, click Uninstall or (Remove device). Related Information • Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) 130 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11) Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11) If you have installed the scanner driver via Web Services, you can access the Web Services scanning menu on your machine's LCD. Certain characters in the messages displayed on the LCD may be replaced with spaces if the language settings of your operating system and your machine are different. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Scan] > [WS Scan]. 3. Select the scan type. 4. Select the computer name where you want to send scanned data. 5. Press [Start]. The machine starts scanning. If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list. Related Information • Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) 131 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol 1. Do one of the following: • Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. • Windows 10 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. 2. Right-click the machine icon, and then select Scan profiles.... The Scan Profiles dialog box appears. 3. Select the scan profile you want to use. 4. Make sure the scanner selected in the Scanner list is a machine that supports Web Services for scanning, and then click the Set as Default button. 5. Click Edit.... The Edit Default Profile dialog box appears. 6. Select the Source, Paper size, Colour format, File type, Resolution (DPI), Brightness and Contrast settings. 7. Click the Save Profile button. These settings will be applied when you scan using the Web Services protocol. If the machine prompts you to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list. Related Information • Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) 132 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to change the machine's Scan Button settings. 1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan. • Windows Launch • (Brother iPrint&Scan). Mac In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears. 2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select your Brother machine. 3. Click the Machine Scan Settings button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to change the scan settings, such as document size, colour, and resolution. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 133 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs If you select Signed PDF for Scan features, you must configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management. To use Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine and your computer. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Signed PDF. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click the Select the Certificate drop-down list, and then select the certificate. 6. Click Submit. 134 Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 135 Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Disable Scanning from Your Computer Disable Scanning from Your Computer To disable the scan function on your computer, disable the Pull Scan setting using Web Based Management. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan from PC. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. In the Pull Scan field, click Disabled. 6. Click Submit. Related Information • Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine 136 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) Scan from Your Computer (Windows) There are several ways you can use your computer to scan photos and documents on your machine. Use the software applications we provide or use your favourite scanning application. • Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) • Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications • Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan 137 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) 1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan. • Windows Launch • (Brother iPrint&Scan). Mac In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears. 2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model's name from the list. Click OK. 3. Click OK again. 4. Click the Scan icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions to scan your documents. Related Information • Scan from Your Computer (Windows) Related Topics: • Brother iPrint&Scan 138 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications You can use the Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE application for scanning. To download the Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE application, click • (Brother Utilities), select Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click PaperPort. • Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11. • For detailed instructions on using each application, click the application's Help menu, and then click Getting Started Guide in the Help ribbon. The instructions for scanning in these steps are for PaperPort™ 14SE. For other Windows applications, the steps will be similar. PaperPort™ 14SE supports both TWAIN and WIA drivers; the TWAIN driver (recommended) is used in these steps. 1. Load your document. 2. Start PaperPort™ 14SE. Do one of the following: • Windows 11 Click • > All apps > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort. Windows 10 Click > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort. 3. Click the Desktop menu, and then click Scan Settings in the Desktop ribbon. The Scan or Get Photo panel appears on the left side of the screen. 4. Click Select. 5. From the available Scanners list, select your model with TWAIN: TW in the name. 6. Click OK. 7. Select the Display scanner dialog box checkbox in the Scan or Get Photo panel. 8. Click Scan. The Scanner Setup dialog box appears. 139 9. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed. 10. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910): Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF. You cannot use PreScan to preview the scanned image. 11. Click PreScan to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning. 12. Click Start. The machine starts scanning. Related Information • Scan from Your Computer (Windows) • TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows) 140 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications > TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows) TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows) • Note that the item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine. • The Contrast option is available only when selecting the Grey (Error Diffusion), True Grey, or 24bit Colour options from the Color Setting drop-down list. 1. Scan Select the Photo, Web, or Text option depending on the type of document you want to scan. Scan (Image Type) Resolution Colour Setting Photo Use for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Colour Web Use for attaching scanned images to web pages. 100 x 100 dpi 24bit Colour Text Use for scanning text documents. 200 x 200 dpi Black & White 2. Resolution Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time, but produce a finer higher quality scanned image. 3. Color Setting Select from a range of scan colour depths. • Black & White Use for text or line art images. • Grey (Error Diffusion) Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey images without using true grey dots. Black dots are arranged in a specific pattern to give a grey appearance.) • True Grey Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256 shades of grey. • 24bit Colour Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time. 141 4. Document Size Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes. If you select Custom, the Custom Document Size dialog box appears and you can specify the document size. 5. Brightness Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the brightness level. 6. Contrast Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value in the field to set the contrast level. 7. 2-sided Scanning Scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature, you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option from the 2-sided Scanning drop-down list, so that when you turn the pages, they are facing the way you want. (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) 8. Advanced Settings Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box. • Document Correction - Auto Deskew Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned. - Detect End of Page (ADF) Detects the end of page and automatically adjusts the size of a page when the length of the document scanned from the ADF is shorter than the selected document size. - Margin Settings (available only for certain models) Adjust the margins in your document. - Rotate Image Rotate the scanned image. - Fill With Color Fill in the edges on four sides of the scanned image using the selected colour and range. - Skip Blank Page Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results. • Image Quality - Background Processing • Remove Bleed-through / Pattern Prevent bleed-through. • Remove Background Colour Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible. - Colour Drop Select a colour to remove from the scanned image. - Edge Emphasis Make the characters of the original sharper. - Reduce Noise Improve the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise option is available when selecting the 24bit Colour option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi scan resolution. • B&W Image Quality 142 - Character Correction • Blurred Character Correction Correct the broken or incomplete characters of the original to make them easier to read. • Boldface Formatting Emphasise the characters of the original by making them bold. - B&W Inversion Invert black and white in the monochrome image. • Feed Control - Layout Select the layout. - Continuous Scan Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select whether to continue scanning or finish. Related Information • Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications 143 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan The Windows Fax and Scan application is another option that you can use for scanning. • Windows Fax and Scan uses the WIA scanner driver. • To crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning a document, you must scan using the scanner glass (also called the flatbed). 1. Load your document. 2. Launch Windows Fax and Scan. 3. Click File > New > Scan. 4. Select the scanner you want to use. 5. Click OK. The New Scan dialog box appears. 6. Adjust the settings in the dialog box, if needed. The scanner resolution can be set to a maximum of 1200 dpi. If you want to scan at higher resolutions, use the Scanner Utility software from Brother Utilities. If your machine supports 2-sided scanning and you want to scan both sides of your document, select Feeder (Scan both sides) from the Source drop-down list 7. Click Scan. The machine starts scanning the document. 144 Related Information • Scan from Your Computer (Windows) • WIA Driver Settings (Windows) 145 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan > WIA Driver Settings (Windows) WIA Driver Settings (Windows) Profile Select the scan profile you want to use from the Profile drop-down list. Source Select the Flatbed, Feeder (Scan one side), or Feeder (Scan both sides) option from the drop-down list. Paper size The Paper size option is available if you select the Feeder (Scan one side) or Feeder (Scan both sides) option from the Source drop-down list. Colour format Select a scan colour format from the Colour format drop-down list. File type Select a file format from the File type drop-down list. Resolution (DPI) Set a scanning resolution in the Resolution (DPI) field. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time, but produce a finer higher quality scanned image. Brightness Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a 146 higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the brightness level. Contrast Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value in the field to set the contrast level. Related Information • Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan 147 Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) Scan from Your Computer (Mac) • Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) • Scan Using AirPrint (macOS) 148 Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management • Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management • Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management 149 Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management Set up a file name for scanned data using Web Based Management. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan File Name. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the File Name Style from the drop-down list. 6. If you selected the option to include the date in File Name Style field, select the date format from the dropdown list. 7. In the Time field, select On to include the time information in the file name. 8. In the Counter field, select Continuous or Reset after each job. If you select Reset after each job, duplication of file names may occur. 9. If you want to create a user-defined file name prefix, type a file name in the user-defined fields of each scan function. Do not use the following characters: ? / \ * 10. Click Submit. Related Information • Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management 150 Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management When you scan a document, the machine will send a scan job email report automatically to the registered email address. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan Job e-mail report. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. In the Administrator Address field, type the email address. 6. For the scan functions you want, select On to send a scan job email report. 7. Click Submit. Related Information • Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management 151 Home > Copy Copy • Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided) • Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided) • Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images • Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature • Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job • Copy an ID Card • Copy Options 152 Home > Copy > Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided) Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided) >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray. 2. Do one of the following: • Place the document face up in the ADF. (If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.) • Place the document face down on the scanner glass. NOTE For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass, not the ADF. 153 3. Press [Copy]. The LCD displays: 4. Change the copy settings, if needed. (Number of copies) • Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways: - Press or on the LCD. - Press to display a numeric keypad on the LCD, and then enter the number of copies. Press [OK]. • [Options] Press to change the copy settings for the next copy only. - When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) - After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as Shortcut] button. Current setting Press the following display area to change these settings for the next copy only. The icon displayed varies depending on the model. - [Quality] - [Tray Use] - [Enlarge/Reduce] 5. Press [Start]. To stop copying, press . MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray. 154 2. Do one of the following: • Place the document face up in the ADF. (If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.) • Place the document face down on the scanner glass. NOTE For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass, not the ADF. 155 3. Press [Copy]. The LCD displays: 4. Change the copy settings, if needed. (Number of copies) • Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways: - Press or on the LCD. - Press to display a numeric keypad on the LCD, and then enter the number of copies. Press [OK]. • [Options] Press • to change the copy settings for the next copy only. - When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) - After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as Shortcut] button. Quick Copy Press > to access the preset copy settings. • Current setting Press the following display area to change these settings for the next copy only. - [Quality] - [Tray Use] - [Enlarge/Reduce] - [Density] 5. Press [Start]. To stop copying, press . 156 Related Information • Copy 157 Home > Copy > Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided) Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided) Reduce the amount of paper you use by copying onto both sides of the paper. • You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start 2-sided copying. • The layout of your original document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose. • For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass, not the ADF. • To use the automatic 2-sided copy feature, you must load your document in the ADF. • When you manually make 2-sided copies from a 2-sided document, use the scanner glass. • Select A4 sized paper when using the 2‑sided copy option. Portrait 2–sided to 2–sided 1 1 2 2 1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip) 1 1 2 2 1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip) 1 2 2 1 Landscape 2–sided to 2–sided 1 1 2 2 1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip) 1 2 1 2 1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip) 1 1 2 2 1. Load your document. 158 NOTE • (For MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) Load your 2-sided document in the ADF. If you use the scanner glass for your 2-sided document, select the [1-sided⇒2-sided] option. • (For DCP-L5510DW) Load your 2-sided document to the scanner glass. 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Enter the number of copies. 4. Press [Options] > [2-sided Copy]. 5. Do one of the following: • To make 2-sided copies of a 2-sided document, press [2-sided⇒2-sided]. • To make 2-sided copies from a 1-sided document, follow these steps: a. To change the layout options, press [Layout], and then press [Long Edge Flip] or [Short Edge Flip]. b. Press [1-sided⇒2-sided]. NOTE (For DCP-L5510DW) If you select [2-sided⇒2-sided], you cannot use the ADF. Use the scanner glass. 6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 7. Press [Start]. If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing. 8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document: For a 2-sided document, turn the sheet over along the long edge to scan the other side. • Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page. • After scanning all the pages, press [Finish]. Related Information • Copy 159 Home > Copy > Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images Select an enlargement or reduction ratio to resize your copied data. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Enter the number of copies. 4. Press [Options] > [Enlarge/Reduce]. 5. Press the option you want. 6. Do one of the following: • If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce], press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use. • If you select [Custom(25-400%)], press (backspace) to erase the displayed percentage, or press d to move the cursor, and then enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25] to [400]. Press [OK]. • If you selected [100%] or [Auto], go to the next step. • [Auto] sets the machine to calculate the reduction ratio that best fits the size of paper. • [Auto] is only available when using the ADF. 7. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 8. Press [Start]. Related Information • Copy 160 Home > Copy > Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature The N in 1 copy feature saves paper by copying two or four pages of your document onto one page of the copy. >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Enter the number of copies. 4. Press [Options] > [Page Layout]. 5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want. Option Description 2in1(Portrait) 2in1(Landscape) 4in1(Portrait) 4in1(Landscape) 6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 7. Press [Start]. If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing. 8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document: • Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page. • After scanning all the pages, press [Finish]. 161 MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Enter the number of copies. 4. Press [Options] > [Page Layout]. 5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want. Option Description 2in1(Portrait) 2in1(Landscape) 4in1(Portrait) 4in1(Landscape) 6. When finished, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 7. Press [Start]. If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing. 8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document: • Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page. • After scanning all the pages, press [Finish]. Related Information • Copy 162 Home > Copy > Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job Interrupt a Print Job with a Copy Job Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Interrupt the current print job to make urgently needed copies. NOTE This function cannot interrupt printing received faxes. The machine can interrupt the following jobs: • print jobs from your computer or mobile devices • copy jobs 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Enter the number of copies. 4. Press [Interrupt]. 5. Press [Start]. If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing. 6. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document: • Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page. • After scanning all the pages, press [Finish]. 7. After the machine has printed copies, press [Interrupt] to restart a print job that is waiting. Related Information • Copy 163 Home > Copy > Copy an ID Card Copy an ID Card You may copy an identification card only to the extent permitted under applicable laws. For more detailed information, see the Product Safety Guide. >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass. 1 1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left) 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Press [ID]. 4. Enter the number of copies. 5. Press [Start]. The machine scans one side of the identification card. 6. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card. 7. Press [Continue] to scan the other side. 164 MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass. 1 1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left) 2. Press [Copy]. 3. Press > on the touchscreen, and then select [2in1(ID)]. 4. Enter the number of copies. 5. Press [Start]. The machine scans one side of the identification card. 6. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card. 7. Press [Continue] to scan the other side. Related Information • Copy 165 Home > Copy > Copy Options Copy Options >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN To change the Copy settings, press [Options]. Menu selections Options Quality Select the copy quality for your type of document. Tray Use Select a paper tray for the next copy. Enlarge/Reduce 100% - Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy. Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy. Auto Adjusts the copy size to fit the paper size you have set. Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio. Density Increase the density to make the text darker. Decrease the density to make the text lighter. 2-sided Copy Select to copy on both sides of the paper. 1-sided → 2-sided 1 1 2 2 2-sided → 2-sided 1 1 2 2 The available options will vary depending on your model. 2-sided Copy Page Layout Select long edge binding or short edge binding. (Available only under certain settings) Contrast Increase the contrast to make an image clearer. Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued. 166 Menu selections Options Stack/Sort Select to stack or sort multiple copies. Stack 1 1 2 2 Sort 2 Page Layout 1 2 1 Make N in 1 copies. 4 in 1 Auto Deskew Set the machine to automatically correct skewed copies. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 To change the Copy settings, press [Options]. Menu selections Options Quality Select the copy quality for your type of document. Tray Use Select a paper tray for the next copy. Enlarge/Reduce 100% - Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy. Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy. Auto Adjusts the copy size to fit the paper size you have set. Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio. Density Increase the density to make the text darker. Decrease the density to make the text lighter. 2-sided Copy Select to copy on both sides of the paper. 167 Menu selections Options 1-sided → 2-sided 1 1 2 2 2-sided → 2-sided 1 1 2 2 The available options will vary depending on your model. 2-sided Copy Page Layout Select long edge binding or short edge binding. (Available only under certain settings) Contrast Increase the contrast to make an image clearer. Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued. Stack/Sort Select to stack or sort multiple copies. Stack 1 1 2 2 Sort 2 Page Layout 1 2 1 Make N in 1 copies. 4 in 1 Auto Deskew Set the machine to automatically correct skewed copies. Related Information • Copy 168 Home > Fax Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Send a Fax • Receive a Fax • Voice Operations and Fax Numbers • Telephone Services and External Devices • Fax Reports • PC-FAX 169 Home > Fax > Send a Fax Send a Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Send a Fax • Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF • Send a Fax Manually • Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation • Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) • Send a Fax in Real Time • Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax) • Add a Cover Page to Your Fax • Cancel a Fax in Progress • Check and Cancel a Pending Fax • Fax Options 170 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax Send a Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Do one of the following: • Place the document face up in the ADF. (If you are faxing multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.) • Place the document face down on the scanner glass. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Enter the fax number. • Using the dial pad Press the digits to enter the fax number. • Using the Address Book 171 Press [Address Book], and then do one of the following: - Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it. - Press [Search], and then enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK]. Press the name you want to dial. When finished, press [Apply]. • Using the Call History [Call History], and then press the [Outgoing Call] option. Press Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the fax number you want, and then press it. To send a fax, press [Apply]. 4. Press [Fax Start]. The machine scans and sends the document. If you placed the document on the scanner glass, follow the instructions in the table. Option Description Yes To scan the next page, press the Yes option, and then place the next page on the scanner glass. Press OK to scan the page. No After you have scanned the last page, press the No option. The machine sends the document. To stop faxing, press , and then press . When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes]. Related Information • Send a Fax 172 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You must select a 2-sided scanning format before sending a 2-sided fax. Select either the Long Edge or Short Edge option, depending on the layout of your document. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press 3. Press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. [Options] > [2-sided Fax]. 4. Do one of the following: • If your document is flipped on the long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option. • If your document is flipped on the short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option. 5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen. 6. Enter the fax number. 7. Press [Fax Start]. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Press [Options] > [2-sided Fax]. 4. Do one of the following: • If your document is flipped on the long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option. • If your document is flipped on the short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option. 5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen. 6. Enter the fax number. 7. Press [Fax Start]. Related Information • Send a Fax 173 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax Manually Send a Fax Manually Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Manual fax transmission lets you hear the dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Pick up the handset of the external telephone. 4. Dial the fax number you want to call. 5. When you hear the fax tone, press [Fax Start]. If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send]. 6. Replace the handset of the external telephone. Related Information • Send a Fax 174 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up. 1. Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press the Start button before hanging up. 2. Load your document. 3. Press [Fax Start]. If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send]. 4. Replace the handset. Related Information • Send a Fax 175 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Broadcasting feature to send the same fax to multiple fax numbers at the same time. • The same broadcast can include Groups, Address Book numbers, and up to 50 manually dialled numbers. • Address Book numbers must be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast. • Group numbers must also be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast. Group numbers include many stored Address Book numbers for easier dialling. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN If you did not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to the maximum number of locations supported by your machine. For information about the broadcasting locations, see Related Information: Specifications. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press 3. Press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. [Options] > [Broadcasting]. 4. Press [Add Number]. You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways: • Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD. Press [OK]. If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK]. (On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.) • Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add to the broadcast. Select the checkboxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you want, press [OK]. • Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name or the first letter of the name, and then press the number you want to add. 5. When finished, press [OK]. If your machine displays , press it. 6. Press [Fax Start]. 176 • The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able to use dual access and delayed fax. • If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press or [Quit] to stop the job. If more than one page has been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you do not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to as many as 350 different numbers. 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Press [Options] > [Broadcasting]. 4. Press [Add Number]. You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways: • Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD. Press [OK]. If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK]. (On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.) • Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add to the broadcast. Select the checkboxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you want, press [OK]. • Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name or the first letter of the name, and then press the number you want to add. 5. When finished, press [OK]. If your machine displays , press it. 6. Press [Fax Start]. • The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able to use dual access and delayed fax. • If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press or [Quit] to stop the job. If more than one page has been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory. Related Information • Send a Fax • Cancel a Broadcast in Progress Related Topics: • Specifications 177 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) > Cancel a Broadcast in Progress Cancel a Broadcast in Progress Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 While broadcasting multiple faxes, you can cancel just the fax currently being transmitted or cancel the whole broadcast job. 1. Press . 2. Press . 3. Do one of the following: • To cancel the entire broadcast, press [Entire Broadcast]. When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes]. • To cancel the current job, press the name or number being dialled on the LCD. When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?], press [Yes]. • To exit without cancelling, press . Related Information • Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) 178 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax in Real Time Send a Fax in Real Time Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When sending a fax, the machine scans the document into the memory before sending it. As soon as the telephone line is free, the machine starts dialling and sending. If you want to send an important document immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory, turn [Real Time TX] on. • If the memory is full and you are sending a fax from the ADF, the machine sends the document in real time (even if [Real Time TX] is set to [Off]). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be sent until you clear some of the memory. • In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass. • If [Real Time TX] is set to on, the option to scan 2-sided documents is not available. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press 3. Press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. [Options] > [Real Time TX]. 4. Press [On] or [Off]. 5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 6. Enter the fax number. 7. Press [Fax Start]. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Press [Options] > [Real Time TX]. 4. Press [On] or [Off]. 5. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting, press to return the fax sending screen. 6. Enter the fax number. 7. Press [Fax Start]. Related Information • Send a Fax 179 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax) Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can store up to 50 faxes in the machine's memory to be sent within the next twenty-four hour period. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press 3. Press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax]. 4. Press [On]. 5. Press [Set Time]. 6. To enter the time you want the fax to be sent, do one of the following: • If you set [12h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 12-hour format. Press [AM] or [PM], and then press [OK]. NOTE If your machine displays • , press it. If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 24-hour format and then press [OK]. (For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.) NOTE If your machine displays , press it. 7. Press [OK]. If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen. 8. Enter the fax number. 9. Press [Fax Start]. 10. Press . MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. 180 If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Press [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax]. 4. Press [On]. 5. Press [Set Time]. 6. To enter the time you want the fax to be sent, do one of the following: • If you set [12h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 12-hour format. Press to select [AM] or [PM], and then press [OK] NOTE If your machine displays • , press it. If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 24-hour format and then press [OK]. (For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.) NOTE If your machine displays , press it. 7. Press [OK]. If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting the time, press to return to the fax sending screen. 8. Enter the fax number. 9. Press [Fax Start]. 10. Press . Related Information • Send a Fax 181 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax Add a Cover Page to Your Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can add a cover page to the next fax or every outgoing fax. • This feature will not work unless you have set up your Station ID. • The cover page includes your Station ID, a comment, and the name stored in the Address Book. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press 3. Press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup]. 4. Press [On]. 5. Press [Coverpage Note]. 6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment. Press . 7. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 8. Enter the fax number. 9. Press [Fax Start]. The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the settings as the new default. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Load your document. 2. Press [Fax]. If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes]. 3. Press [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup]. 4. Press [On]. 5. Press [Coverpage Note]. 6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment. Press . 7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment. Press . 182 If your machine displays , press it. 8. Press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) If the [OK] button is not displayed after setting, press to return the fax sending screen. 9. Enter the fax number. 10. Press [Fax Start]. The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the settings as the new default. Related Information • Send a Fax • Create a Cover Page Message 183 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Create a Cover Page Message Create a Cover Page Message Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Create up to two custom cover page messages to add to outgoing faxes. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Note]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [5.] or [6.] to store your customised message. 3. Enter the cover page message using the LCD. Press [OK]. Press to select numbers, letters, or special characters. If your machine displays 4. Press , press . . Related Information • Add a Cover Page to Your Fax 184 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Cancel a Fax in Progress Cancel a Fax in Progress Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press . 2. Press while the machine is dialling or sending a fax. The LCD displays [Cancel Job?]. 3. Press an option in the table to cancel or continue the fax job in progress. Option Description Yes The machine cancels sending the fax job. No The machine does not cancel the fax job. Related Information • Send a Fax 185 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Check and Cancel a Pending Fax Check and Cancel a Pending Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can cancel a fax job before it is sent, while it is stored in the memory. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remaining Jobs]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the waiting jobs, and then press the job you want to cancel. 3. Press [Cancel]. 4. Press [Yes] to cancel the fax job or press [No] to exit without cancelling. 5. When finished, press . Related Information • Send a Fax 186 Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Fax Options Fax Options Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options]. Option Description Fax Resolution Set the resolution for outgoing faxes. The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax Resolution. Contrast Adjust the contrast. If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast may improve the fax quality. 2-sided Fax Set the 2-sided scanning format. (For automatic 2-sided scanning models) Glass Scan Size Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the document. Broadcasting Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the same time. Preview Preview a fax message before you send it. Delayed Fax Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent. Real Time TX Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory. Coverpage Setup Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover page. Overseas Mode Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas. Call History Select a number from the Call History. Address Book Select a number from the Address Book. Set New Default Save your settings as the default. Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings. You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut]. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 To change the fax-sending settings, press the [Options] button. Option Description Fax Resolution Set the resolution for outgoing faxes. The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax Resolution. Contrast Adjust the contrast. 187 Option Description If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast may improve the fax quality. 2-sided Fax Set the 2-sided scanning format. (For automatic 2-sided scanning models) Glass Scan Size Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the document. Broadcasting Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the same time. Preview Preview a fax message before you send it. Delayed Fax Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent. Real Time TX Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory. Coverpage Setup Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover page. Overseas Mode Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas. Call History Select a number from the Call History. Address Book Select a number from the Address Book. Set New Default Save your settings as the default. Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings. You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut]. Related Information • Send a Fax 188 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax Receive a Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Receive Mode Settings • Memory Receive Options • Remote Fax Retrieval 189 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings Receive Mode Settings Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Receive Modes Overview • Choose the Correct Receive Mode • Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay) • Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring) • Set Fax Detect • Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax • Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes • Set the Fax Receive Stamp • Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation 190 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive Modes Overview Receive Modes Overview Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Some receive modes answer automatically (Fax Only Mode and Fax/Tel Mode). You may want to change the Ring Delay before using these modes. Fax Only Mode ([Fax Only] in the machine's menu) Fax Only Mode automatically answers every call as a fax. Fax/Tel Mode ([Fax/Tel] in the machine's menu) Fax/Tel Mode helps you manage incoming calls, by recognising whether they are fax or voice calls and handling them in the following ways: • Faxes will be received automatically. • Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the call. The F/T ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring made by your machine. Manual Mode ([Manual] in the machine's menu) Manual Mode turns off all automatic answering operations unless you are using the BT Call Sign feature. To receive a fax in Manual Mode, lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine. When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press the buttons in the table to receive a fax. Use the Fax Detect feature to receive faxes when you have lifted a handset on the same line as the machine. Applicable Models To receive a fax MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Fax Start > Receive External TAD Mode ([External TAD] in the machine's menu) External TAD Mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls. Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways: • Faxes will be received automatically. • Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD. Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 191 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Choose the Correct Receive Mode Choose the Correct Receive Mode Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You must choose a Receive Mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you have on your line. By default, your machine will automatically receive any faxes that are sent to it. The diagram below will help you select the correct mode. Do you want to use the telephone feature of your machine (if available), an external telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the same line as the machine? Fax Only Mode No Yes Are you using the voice message function of an external telephone answering device? External TAD Mode Yes No Do you want the machine to answer fax and telephone calls automatically? Fax/Tel Mode Yes No 1. Press Manual Mode [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Receive Mode]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. (U.K. only) If you cannot change the [Receive Mode] option, make sure the BT Call Sign feature is set to Off. 2. Press [Fax Only], [Fax/Tel], [External TAD], or [Manual]. 3. Press . Related Information • Receive Mode Settings Related Topics: • Telephone and Fax Problems 192 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay) Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When somebody calls your machine, you will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set in the Ring Delay option. • The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in the Fax Only and Fax/Tel Modes. • If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, choose the maximum number of rings. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Ring Delay]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the number of rings you want. If you select [0], the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all (available only for some countries). 3. Press . Related Information • Receive Mode Settings Related Topics: • Telephone and Fax Problems 193 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring) Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel Mode, if the call is a fax, your machine will automatically receive it. However, if it is a voice call, the machine will sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) for the time you set in the F/T Ring Time option. When you hear the F/T ring, it means that a voice caller is on the line. The F/T Ring Time feature works when you set Fax/Tel Mode as the Receive Mode. Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can still answer the call on any telephone. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [F/T Ring Time]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press how long you want the machine to ring to alert you that you have a voice call. 3. Press . Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set time. Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 194 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set Fax Detect Set Fax Detect Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If Fax Detect is On: The machine receives a fax call automatically, even if you answer the call. When you see [Receiving] on the LCD or when you hear “chirps” through the handset you are using, just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest. If Fax Detect is Off: If you are at the machine and answer a fax call by lifting the handset, press the buttons in the following table to receive the fax. If you answered at an extension or external telephone, press *51. Applicable Models MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910 To receive a fax Fax > Fax Start > Receive • If this feature is set to [On], but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension or external telephone handset, press the remote activation code *51. • If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set Fax Detect to [Off]. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Detect]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 195 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you enable the auto reduction function, the machine reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on your paper. The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the fax page size and your Paper Size setting. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Auto Reduction]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 196 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Your machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper when [2-sided] is set to [On]. • Use A4 size paper (60 to 105 g/m2) for this function. • When 2-sided printing is enabled, incoming faxes are automatically reduced to fit the paper in the paper tray. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [2-sided]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 197 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Fax Receive Stamp Set the Fax Receive Stamp Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can set the machine to print the received date and time at the top centre of each received fax page. • Make sure you have set the current date and time on the machine. • The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Rx Stamp]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 198 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you are speaking on the telephone connected to your machine and the other party is also speaking on a telephone connected to his fax machine, at the end of the conversation, the other party can send you a fax before you both hang up. Your machine's ADF must be empty. 1. Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press Start or Send. 2. When you hear the CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press [Fax Start]. If the machine is in Automatic Redial, wait until it is finished and try again. 3. Press [Receive] to receive a fax. 4. Replace the external handset. Related Information • Receive Mode Settings 199 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options Memory Receive Options Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Memory Receive options to direct incoming faxes while you are away from the machine. You can use only one Memory Receive option at a time. Memory Receive can be set to: • PC-Fax Receive • Fax Forwarding • Fax Storage • Forward to Cloud (The machine forwards your received faxes to online services.) • Forward to Network (The machine forwards your received faxes to a network destination.) • Off • Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only) • Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine • Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory • Change Memory Receive Options • Turn Memory Receive Off • Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory • Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination 200 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only) Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Turn the PC-Fax Receive feature on to automatically store incoming faxes to your machine's memory, and then send them to your computer. Use your computer to view and store these faxes. To transfer the received faxes to your computer you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on your computer. Even if you have turned computer off (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory. When you start your computer and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your computer automatically. If you selected [Backup Print: On], the machine will also print the fax. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [PC Fax Receive]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On]. 3. Press [OK], and then follow the instructions on the LCD. • PC-Fax Receive is not available for macOS. • If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in the memory, you can use this setting to transfer your faxes to your computer. 4. Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer you want to receive faxes if you are on a network, and then press [OK]. 5. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. 6. Press . Related Information • Memory Receive Options 201 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Fax Forwarding feature to automatically forward your incoming faxes to another machine. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Fax Forward]. 3. Do one of the following: • Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD. Press [OK]. To forward a fax using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK]. Select the file type you want. (On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.) • Press [Address Book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want your faxes to be forwarded. Press the fax number or email address you want. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On], the machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine. 4. Press . Related Information • Memory Receive Options 202 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Fax Storage feature to store incoming faxes in the machine's memory. Retrieve your stored fax messages from your fax machine when you are at another location using the Remote Retrieval commands. Your machine will print a backup copy of each stored fax. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Fax Storage]. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On], the machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine. 3. Press . Related Information • Memory Receive Options 203 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Change Memory Receive Options Change Memory Receive Options Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If received faxes are in your machine's memory when you change the Remote Fax operations, the LCD will ask you one of the following questions: If received faxes have been printed automatically, the LCD displays [Erase all documents?] • Do one of the following: - If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be erased before the setting changes. - If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged. If unprinted faxes are in the machine's memory, the LCD displays [Print all faxes?] • Do one of the following: - If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be printed before the setting changes. - If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be printed and the setting will be unchanged. If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to [PC Fax Receive] from another option ([Fax Forward] or [Fax Storage]). • Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer if you are on a network, and then press [OK]. You will be asked if you want to turn on Backup Print. The LCD displays: [Send Fax to PC?] - If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be sent to your computer before the setting changes. - If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged. Related Information • Memory Receive Options 204 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Turn Memory Receive Off Turn Memory Receive Off Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Turn Memory Receive off if you do not want the machine to save or transfer incoming faxes. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Off]. The LCD displays options if there are received faxes still in your machine's memory. 3. Press . Related Information • Memory Receive Options 205 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you select [Fax Storage], you can still print a fax from the machine's memory. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Print Document]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Yes]. Related Information • Memory Receive Options Related Topics: • Error and Maintenance Messages 206 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Set up a profile to forward incoming faxes directly to a folder on an FTP, SFTP, CIFS, or SharePoint server. • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Network Profile. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the FTP, SFTP, Network, or SharePoint option, and then click Submit. 6. Set up the profile for your server, using one of the following tables: Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. FTP Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189). Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default setting is port 21. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the FTP server. Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to forward securely using SSL/TLS communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed. 207 Option Description Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the FTP server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc). Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. SFTP Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189). Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the SFTP server. Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key. Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the authentication type. Server Public Key Select the authentication type. Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc). Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. Network Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, type the user name in one of the following styles: user@domain domain\user Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters). 208 You must configure the SNTP (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel. The time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server. SharePoint Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared %20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx). SSL/TLS If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://", you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server Certificate checkbox. Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected automatically. Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles: • user@domain • domain\user Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters). 7. Click Submit. 8. To set the Fax Forward feature, go to the navigation menu, and then click Fax > Remote Fax Options. 9. Select Forward to Network from the Fwd/Store/Cloud/Network drop-down list. 10. Select the file type you want to use. 11. To print a backup copy of incoming faxes, select On for Backup print. 12. Select the profile you want to use from the Network Profile drop-down list. 13. Type a three-digit Remote Access Code in the Remote Access Code field, if needed. • You can use the numbers 0 through 9, *, or # for the Remote Access Code. • The Remote Access Code must be different from the remote codes for the Fax features. 14. Click Submit. Related Information • Memory Receive Options • Network Features 209 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval Remote Fax Retrieval Use Remote Retrieval to call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine, and use a remote access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages. • Set a Remote Access Code • Use Your Remote Access Code • Remote Retrieval Commands • Forward Faxes Remotely • Change the Fax Forwarding Number 210 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Set a Remote Access Code Set a Remote Access Code Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Set a Remote Access Code to access and control your machine even when you are away from it. Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you must set up your own code. The factory default code is the inactive code (---*). 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remote Access]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter a three-digit code using the numbers [0] to [9], [*] or [#] using the LCD (the preset '*' cannot be changed), and then press [OK]. • DO NOT use the same code used for your Remote Activation Code (*51) or Remote Deactivation Code (#51). • To make your code inactive, press and hold to restore the inactive setting (---*), and then press [OK]. 3. Press . Related Information • Remote Fax Retrieval 211 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Use Your Remote Access Code Use Your Remote Access Code Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone. 2. When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). 3. The machine signals if it has received messages: • One long beep -- Fax messages • No beeps -- No messages 4. When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command. • The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command. • The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command. 5. Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you are finished. 6. Hang up. This function may not be available in some countries or supported by your local telephone company. Related Information • Remote Fax Retrieval 212 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Remote Retrieval Commands Remote Retrieval Commands Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Remote Commands in this table to access fax commands and options when you are away from your machine. When you call the machine and enter your remote access code (three digits followed by *), the system will sound two short beeps and you must enter a Remote Command (column 1), followed by one of the options (column 2) for that command. Remote Command Option 95 Change the Fax Forwarding, or Fax Storage settings 1 OFF You can select Off after you retrieve or erase all your messages. 2 Fax Forwarding One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot make a change because one of the settings may not be configured correctly (for example, a Fax Forwarding number has not been registered). You can register your Fax Forwarding number by entering 4. After you register the number, Fax Forwarding will work. 4 Fax Forwarding number 6 Fax Storage 96 97 Retrieve a fax 2 Retrieve all faxes Enter the fax number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax messages. 3 Erase faxes from memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased from memory. Check the receiving status 1 Fax 98 Description Check whether your machine has received any faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If not, you will hear three short beeps. Change the Receive Mode 1 External TAD 2 Fax/Tel One long beep means the change has been accepted. 3 Fax Only 90 Exit Press 9 0 to stop remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then hang up. Related Information • Remote Fax Retrieval 213 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Forward Faxes Remotely Forward Faxes Remotely Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine to forward incoming faxes to another machine. You must turn Fax Storage on to use this feature. 1. Dial your fax number. 2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one long beep, you have messages. 3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2. 4. Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages sent, followed by # # (up to 20 digits). You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause. 5. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print your fax messages. Related Information • Remote Fax Retrieval 214 Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Change the Fax Forwarding Number Change the Fax Forwarding Number Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can change your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine. 1. Dial your fax number. 2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one long beep, you have messages. 3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4. 4. Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #. You will hear one long beep. You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause. 5. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished. 6. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Related Information • Remote Fax Retrieval 215 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers Voice Operations and Fax Numbers Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Voice Operations • Store Fax Numbers • Set up Broadcasting Groups • Combine Address Book Numbers 216 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations Voice Operations • Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode 217 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (fast double-ring) to alert you to pick up a voice call. If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press the button in the following table to answer: Applicable Models To pick up a voice call MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910 Pickup If you are at an extension telephone, lift the handset during the F/T Ring, and then press #51 between the fast double-rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by pressing *51. Related Information • Voice Operations 218 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers Store Fax Numbers Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Store Address Book Numbers • Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers 219 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers Store Address Book Numbers Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book]. 2. Do the following steps: a. Press [Edit]. b. Press [Add New Address]. c. Press [Name]. d. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK]. e. Press [Address]. f. Enter the fax or telephone number using the LCD (up to 20 digits), and then press [OK]. To store an email address to use with Internet Fax or Scan to Email server, press and enter the email address and press [OK]. (On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.) g. Press [OK]. To store another Address Book number, repeat these steps. 3. Press . Related Information • Store Fax Numbers • Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book 220 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers > Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can copy numbers from your Outgoing Call history and save them in your Address Book. 1. Press [Fax] > [Call History] > [Outgoing Call]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it. 3. Press [Edit] > [Add to Address Book] > [Name]. To delete the number, press [Edit] > [Delete]. Press [Yes] to confirm. 4. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters). 5. Press [OK]. 6. Press [OK] to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store. 7. Press . Related Information • Store Address Book Numbers 221 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit]. 2. Do one of the following: Press [Change] to edit the names or fax or telephone numbers. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to change, and then press it. - To change the name, press [Name]. Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. - To change the fax or telephone number, press [Address]. Enter the new fax or telephone number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. Press [OK] to finish. How to enter text: To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then press . Enter the new character. To delete numbers, press [Delete]. Select the fax or telephone numbers you want to delete by pressing them to display a check mark, and then press [OK]. 3. Press . Related Information • Store Fax Numbers 222 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups Set up Broadcasting Groups Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 A broadcasting group can be stored in the Address Book. It allows you to send the same fax message to many fax numbers. Store fax numbers in the Address Book and add them to a broadcasting group as needed. Applicable Models Maximum number of groups Maximum numbers in a group MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 20 299 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book]. 2. Do the following steps: a. Press [Edit] > [Setup Groups] > [Name]. b. Enter the Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. c. Press [Add/Delete]. d. Add Address Book numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a check mark, and then press [OK]. e. Read and confirm the displayed list of names and numbers you have chosen, and then press [OK] to save your Group. To store another Group for broadcasting, repeat these steps. 3. Press . Related Information • Voice Operations and Fax Numbers • Change a Broadcasting Group Name • Delete a Broadcasting Group • Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member 223 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Change a Broadcasting Group Name Change a Broadcasting Group Name Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name. 3. Press [Name]. 4. Enter the new Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. How to change the stored name: To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then press . Enter the new character. 5. Press [OK]. 6. Press . Related Information • Set up Broadcasting Groups 224 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Delete a Broadcasting Group Delete a Broadcasting Group Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Delete]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name. 3. Press [OK]. 4. Press . Related Information • Set up Broadcasting Groups 225 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups > Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name. 3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Add/Delete] option, and then press [Add/Delete]. 4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete. 5. Do the following for each number you want to change: • To add a number to the Group, press the checkbox of the number to add a check mark. • To delete a number from the Group, press the checkbox of the number to remove the check mark. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Press [OK]. 8. Press . Related Information • Set up Broadcasting Groups 226 Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Combine Address Book Numbers Combine Address Book Numbers Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Sometimes you may want to choose from several long-distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of longdistance carriers and credit card numbers as Address Book numbers. You can store these long dialling sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate Address Book numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialling using the dial pad. For example: You might have stored '01632' and '960555' in your machine as shown in the following table. Applicable Models '01632' stored in '960555' stored in MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910 Address Book: Brother 1 Address Book: Brother 2 You can use them both to dial '01632-960555' by using the following procedure. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1. 3. Press the number. 4. Press [Apply]. 5. Press [Options]. 6. Press a or b to display the [Address Book] option, and then press it. 7. Press [OK]. 8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2. 9. Press the number. 10. Press [Apply]. 11. Press [Fax Start]. The machine will dial '01632-960555'. To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For example, to change the number to '01632-960556', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 01632) using the Address Book, press [Apply], and then enter 960556 using the LCD. If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialling sequence, create a pause in the number by pressing [Pause]. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book]. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1. 3. Press the number. 4. Press [Apply]. 227 5. Press [Address Book]. 6. Press [OK]. 7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2. 8. Press the number. 9. Press [Apply]. 10. Press [Fax Start]. The machine will dial '01632-960555'. To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For example, to change the number to '01632-960556', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 01632) using the Address Book, press [Apply], and then enter 960556 using the LCD. If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialling sequence, create a pause in the number by pressing [Pause]. Related Information • Voice Operations and Fax Numbers 228 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices Telephone Services and External Devices Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Use BT Call Sign • Set the Telephone Line Type • External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) • External and Extension Telephones • Multi-line Connections (PBX) 229 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign Use BT Call Sign Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 This feature lets you use the BT Call Sign subscriber service which allows you to have at least two separate telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone number has its own distinctive ringing pattern, so you know which telephone number is ringing. This is one way you can have a separate telephone number for your machine. Your machine has a BT Call Sign compatible distinctive ringing function, allowing you to dedicate a second telephone number (on the same telephone line) just for receiving faxes. • This feature is available only in the U.K. • You can switch BT Call Sign Off temporarily, then turn it back on. When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this function. This machine will automatically answer incoming calls that use your new fax number. • When you set the BT Call Sign feature to On, the receive mode is set to [Manual] automatically. The [Manual] mode will not respond to incoming telephone calls, because the number you use for telephone calls will use the normal ring pattern. Related Information • Telephone Services and External Devices • Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign 230 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign > Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • This feature is available only in the U.K. • This feature will only work with your external phone. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [BT Call Sign]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . If you turn BT Call Sign off, the receive mode stays in Manual mode. You will need to set the receive mode again. Related Information • Use BT Call Sign 231 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type Set the Telephone Line Type Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you are connecting the machine to a line that features PBX or ISDN to send and receive faxes, you must select a Telephone Line Type that matches your line's features. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Phone Line Set]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Normal], [PBX], or [ISDN]. 3. If you selected [PBX], do the following: a. Press [On] or [Always]. • If you select [On], the machine dials a prefix number before the fax number only when [R] is pressed. • If you select [Always], the machine always dials a prefix number before the fax number. b. Press [Dial Prefix]. c. Enter the prefix number using the LCD, and then press [OK]. Use the numbers 0 to 9, #, * and !. You cannot use ! with any other numbers or characters. 4. Press . Related Information • Telephone Services and External Devices • PBX and TRANSFER 232 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type > PBX and TRANSFER PBX and TRANSFER Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 The machine's [Phone Line Set] default setting is [Normal], which lets the machine connect to a standard Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) line. However, many offices use a central telephone system or Private Branch Exchange (PBX). Your machine can be connected to most types of PBX. The machine's recall feature supports timed break recall only (TBR). TBR will work with most PBX systems allowing you to gain access to an outside line, or transfer calls to another extension. To use this feature, press the button in the table. Applicable Models To use the machine's recall feature MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 R Assign a telephone number to the button stored in the Address Book (One Touch Dial and Speed Dial in some models). When programming the Address Book number (One Touch Dial number and Speed Dial number in some models), press the button first (the LCD displays ‘!’), then enter the telephone number. This avoids having to press the button each time before you dial from the Address Book (One Touch Dial or Speed Dial). Your Telephone Line Type must be set to PBX on the machine to use this feature. Related Information • Set the Telephone Line Type 233 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Connect an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the TAD answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine. If it hears them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice message and the LCD will show [Telephone]. The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend setting it to two rings). This is because your machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it. 1 1 (Example for U.K.) 1 TAD IMPORTANT DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line. If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD. Related Information • Telephone Services and External Devices • Connect an External TAD • Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD 234 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) > Connect an External TAD Connect an External TAD Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Set your external TAD to the minimum number of rings allowed. For more information, contact your telephone provider. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.) 2. Record an outgoing message on your external TAD. 3. Set the TAD to answer calls. 4. Set the Receive Mode on your machine to [External TAD]. Related Information • External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) 235 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) > Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for fax tones. 2. Limit your speaking to 20 seconds. 3. End your 20-second message by giving your Remote Activation Code for those who may need to send faxes manually. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and start to send a fax.” NOTE We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial five-second silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving faxes, then you should re-record the OGM to include it. Related Information • External TAD (Telephone Answering Device) 236 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones External and Extension Telephones Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Connect an External or Extension Telephone • Operation from External and Extension Telephones • Use Extension Telephones • If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset • Use the Remote Codes 237 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Connect an External or Extension Telephone Connect an External or Extension Telephone Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below. 1 2 (Example for U.K.) 1 Extension telephone 2 External telephone Make sure you use an external telephone with a cable no more than three metres long. Related Information • External and Extension Telephones 238 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Operation from External and Extension Telephones Operation from External and Extension Telephones Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you answer a fax call at an extension or an external telephone, you can make your machine take the call by using the Remote Activation Code. When you press the Remote Activation Code *51, the machine starts to receive the fax. If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an extension telephone by pressing the Remote Deactivation Code #51. If you answer a call and no one is on the line: You are receiving a manual fax. Press *51 and wait for the chirp or until the LCD displays [Receiving], and then hang up. You can also use the Fax Detect feature to make your machine automatically take the call. Related Information • External and Extension Telephones 239 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use Extension Telephones Use Extension Telephones Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Your premises may already be wired with parallel extension telephones, or you may plan to add extension telephones to your line, as well as your machine. While the simplest arrangement is a straightforward parallel connection, there are some problems with this. The most obvious is inadvertent interruption of a fax transmission caused by someone picking up an extension telephone to make an outgoing call. Also, the remote activation code feature may not operate reliably in such a simple configuration. This machine may also be set to make a delayed transmission (a transmission at a preset time). This preset job may coincide with someone picking up an extension handset. These problems can be eliminated, if you arrange modification of your extension wiring circuit, such that extension devices are connected “downstream” of your machine in a master/slave configuration (see Figure 1). In this configuration the machine can always detect whether a telephone is in use. Thus it will not attempt to use the line during that time. This is known as “telephone off-hook detection.” The inadvisable configuration is shown in figure 2, and the recommended master/slave configuration is shown in figure 1. This new connection configuration can be arranged by contacting BT, Kingston upon Hull Telecommunications, your PBX maintainer, or a qualified telephone installation company. The extension telephone circuit should be terminated on a normal modular plug (BT 431A style), which in turn should be put into the modular socket of the white “T”-shaped connector provided as part of the line cord assembly. Connection of Extension Sockets: Recommended (Figure 1) 1 1 2 3 FAX 1. Extension socket 2. Master socket 3. Incoming line Connection of Extension Sockets: Not Recommended (Figure 2) 1 1 2 3 FAX 1. Extension socket 2. Master socket 3. Incoming line The fax machine must be plugged into the master socket. These telephones are now connected as external devices, because they are connected to the machine via the T-connector. Related Information • External and Extension Telephones 240 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the telephone line cord and you typically carry the cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay. If you let the machine answer first, you must go to the machine so you can press [Pickup] or Tel/R to transfer the call to the cordless handset. Related Information • External and Extension Telephones 241 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the Remote Codes Use the Remote Codes Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Remote Activation Code If you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing the Remote Activation Code *51. Wait for the chirping sounds, and then replace the handset. If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing the buttons in the following table: Applicable Models To make the machine receive a fax MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Fax Start and then Receive Remote Deactivation Code If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51 (make sure you press this between the rings). If the machine answers a voice call and fast double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the external telephone by pressing the button in the following table: Applicable Models To pick up a voice call MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Pickup Related Information • External and Extension Telephones • Change the Remote Codes 242 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the Remote Codes > Change the Remote Codes Change the Remote Codes Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 The preset Remote Activation Code is *51. The preset Remote Deactivation Code is #51. If you are always disconnected when accessing your External TAD remotely, try changing the three-digit remote codes using the numbers 0-9, * or #. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Remote Codes]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Do one of the following: • To change the Remote Activation Code, press [Act.Code]. Enter the new code, and then press [OK]. • To change the Remote Deactivation Code, press [Deact.Code]. Enter the new code, and then press [OK]. • If you do not want to change the Codes, go to the next step. • To turn off (or turn on) the Remote Codes, press [Remote Codes], and then press [Off] (or [On]). 3. Press . Related Information • Use the Remote Codes 243 Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Multi-line Connections (PBX) Multi-line Connections (PBX) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 We suggest you ask the company that installed your PBX to connect your machine. If you have a multi-line system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the machine from being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls are answered by a switchboard operator, we recommend setting the Receive Mode to [Manual]. We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate correctly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX. Related Information • Telephone Services and External Devices 244 Home > Fax > Fax Reports Fax Reports • Print a Transmission Verification Report • Print a Fax Journal 245 Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Transmission Verification Report Print a Transmission Verification Report Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving party's name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent, and whether or not the transmission was successful. There are several settings available for the Transmission Verification Report: On Prints a report after every fax you send. On(+Image) Prints a report after every fax you send. A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report. Error only Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error. Error only (+Image) Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error. A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report. Off Your machine does not print any reports after sending faxes. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [XMIT Report]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the option you want. If you select [On(+Image)] or [Error only(+Image)], the image will not appear on the Transmission Verification Report if Real Time Transmission is set to [On]. 3. Press . If the transmission is successful, OK appears next to RESULT on the Transmission Verification Report. If the transmission is not successful, NG appears next to RESULT. Related Information • Fax Reports 246 Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Fax Journal Print a Fax Journal Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can set the machine to print a Fax Journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Journal Period] > [Journal Period]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the interval you want, and then press it. • Every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days The machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all reception and transmission log data from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 log data before the time you selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the log data from the memory. • Every 50 Faxes The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 reception and transmission log data. 3. If you selected every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, do one of the following to enter the time to start printing: • If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 12-hour format) using the LCD. Press to select [AM] or [PM]. Press [OK]. • If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, press [Time], and then enter the time (in 24hour format) using the LCD. Press [OK]. (For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.) 4. If you selected [Every 7 Days], press [Day]. 5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Every Monday], [Every Tuesday], [Every Wednesday], [Every Thursday], [Every Friday], [Every Saturday] or [Every Sunday] option, and then press the first day of the 7-day countdown. 6. Press . Related Information • Fax Reports 247 Home > Fax > PC-FAX PC-FAX Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • PC-FAX for Windows • PC-FAX for Mac 248 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows PC-FAX for Windows Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • PC-FAX Overview (Windows) • Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows) • Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) 249 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) PC-FAX Overview (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Reduce paper consumption and save time by using the Brother PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from your computer. • Configure PC-FAX (Windows) • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 250 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure PC-FAX (Windows) Configure PC-FAX (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Before sending faxes using PC-FAX, personalise the send options in each tab of the PC-FAX Setup dialog box. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending. The PC-FAX Setup dialog box appears. 3. Do one of the following: • Click the User Information tab, and then type your user information in the fields. Each Microsoft account can have its own customised User Information screen for custom fax headers and cover pages. • Click the Sending tab, and then type the number needed to access an outside line (if needed) in the Outside line access field. Select the Include header checkbox to include the header information. • Click the Address Book tab, and then select the address book you want to use for PC-FAX from the Select Address Book drop-down list. 4. Click OK. Related Information • PC-FAX Overview (Windows) 251 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Add, edit, and delete members and groups to personalise your Address Book. • Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) • Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) • Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) • Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) • Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) • Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) 252 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) > Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Add new people and their fax information to the PC-Fax Address Book if you want to send a fax using the Brother PC-Fax software. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send). The Address Book dialog box appears. 3. Click to add new members. The Address Book Member Setup dialog box appears. 4. Type the member's information in the corresponding fields. The Name field is required. 5. Click OK. Related Information • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 253 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) > Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Create a group to broadcast the same PC-FAX to several recipients at once. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send). The Address Book dialog box appears. 3. Click to add a new group. The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears. 4. Type the name of the new group in the Group Name field. 5. In the Available Names field, select each name you want to include in the group, and then click Add >>. Members added to the group appear in the Group Members box. 6. When finished, click OK. Each group can contain up to 50 members. Related Information • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 254 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) > Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send). The Address Book dialog box appears. 3. Select the member or group you want to edit. 4. Click (Properties). 5. Change the member or group information. 6. Click OK. Related Information • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 255 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) > Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send). The Address Book dialog box appears. 3. Select the member or group you want to delete. 4. Click (Delete). 5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK. Related Information • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 256 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) > Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can export the Address Book as an ASCII text file (*.csv) or a vCard (an electronic business card) and save it on your computer. You cannot export the group settings when you export the Address Book data. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send). The Address Book dialog box appears. 3. Click File > Export. 4. Select one of the following: • Text The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to the next step. • vCard You must select the member you want to export from your address book before selecting this option. Browse to the folder where you want to save the vCard, type the vCard name in the File name field, and then click Save. 5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to export, and then click Add >>. Select and add the items in the order you want them listed. 6. If you are exporting to an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to separate the data fields. 7. Click OK. 8. Browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save the data, type the file name, and then click Save. 257 Related Information • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 258 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) > Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or vCards (electronic business cards) into your Address Book. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send). The Address Book dialog box appears. 3. Click File > Import. 4. Select one of the following: • Text The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 5. • vCard Go to step 8. 5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to import, and then click Add >>. You must select and add fields from the Available Items list in the same order they are listed in the import text file. 6. If you are importing an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to separate the data fields. 7. Click OK. 8. Browse to the folder where you want to import the data, type the file name, and then click Open. Related Information • Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows) 259 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows) Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 PC-FAX supports only monochrome faxes. A monochrome fax will be sent even if the original data is in colour and the receiving fax machine supports colour faxes. 1. Create a file in any application on your computer. 2. Select the print command in your application. 3. Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then complete your print operation. The Brother PC-FAX dialog box appears. 4. Type a fax number using one of the following methods: • Click the numbers on the dial pad to type the number, and then click Add Send Address. If you select the Dial Restriction checkbox, a confirmation dialog box will appear for you to re-type the fax number using the keyboard. This feature helps to prevent transmissions to the wrong destination. • Click the Address Book button, and then select a member or group from the Address Book. If you make a mistake, click All Clear to delete all entries. 5. To include a cover page, select the Add Cover Page checkbox. You can also click to create or edit a cover page. 6. Click Start to send the fax. • To cancel the fax, click Cancel. • To redial a number, click Redial to show the last five fax numbers, select a number, and then click Start. Related Information • PC-FAX for Windows 260 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Brother PC-FAX software to receive faxes on your computer, view them, and print only the faxes you want. • Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) 261 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 The Brother PC-FAX Receive software lets you view and store faxes on your computer. It is automatically installed when you install your machine's software and drivers and works on locally or network-connected machines. PC-FAX Receive supports only monochrome faxes. When you turn your computer off, your machine will continue to receive and store faxes in your machine's memory. The machine's LCD will display the number of stored faxes received. When you start this application, the software will transfer all received faxes to your computer at once. You can enable the Backup Print option if you want the machine to print a copy of the fax before the fax is sent to your computer, or before the computer is switched off. You can configure the Backup Print settings from your machine. Related Information • Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) • Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) • View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows) 262 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If PC-FAX receiving is disabled on your machine, enable the setting before trying to run PC-FAX Receive. For information on how to enable this function, , see Related Information: Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management. We recommend selecting the Start PC-FAX Receive on computer startup checkbox so that the software runs automatically and transfers any faxes when you turn your computer on. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive. 3. Confirm the message and click Yes. The PC-FAX Receive window appears. The (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon also appears in your computer task tray. Related Information • Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) • Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) • Add Your Machine to PC-FAX Receive Devices (Windows) Related Topics: • Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management 263 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) > Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray. The PC-FAX Receive window appears. 2. Click Settings. 3. Configure these options as needed: Preferences Configure to start PC-FAX Receive automatically when you start Windows. Save Configure the path to save PC-FAX files and select the received document format. Upload to Configure the path to the server and select the option to upload automatically or manually (available only for administrators). Device Select the machine where you want to receive PC-FAX files. Lock (available only for administrators) Restrict users who do not have administrator privileges from configuring the settings options shown above. 4. Click OK. 264 Related Information • Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) 265 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) > Add Your Machine to PC-FAX Receive Devices (Windows) Add Your Machine to PC-FAX Receive Devices (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If you installed your machine following the on-screen instructions, the machine should be ready for use. 1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray. The PC-FAX Receive window appears. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click Device > Add. 4. Select the correct connection method. Select your machine from the automatic search results below. A list of connected machines appears. Select the machine you want. Click OK. Specify your machine by IP address Type the machine's IP address in the IP Address field, and then click OK. 5. To change the computer name that will appear on the machine's LCD, type the new name in the Enter your PC display name (Max 15 Characters) field. 6. Click OK. Related Information • Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) 266 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows) View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Receiving Status Icon Status Standby mode No unread messages Receiving messages Messages received Unread messages 1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray. The PC-FAX Receive window appears. 2. Click any faxes in the list to view them. 3. When finished, close the window. 267 Even after closing the window, PC-FAX Receive is active and the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon will remain in your computer task tray. To close PC-FAX Receive, click the icon in the computer task tray and click Close. Related Information • Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) 268 Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Mac PC-FAX for Mac Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS) 269 Home > Network Network • Supported Basic Network Features • Configure Network Settings • Wireless Network Settings • Network Features 270 Home > Network > Supported Basic Network Features Supported Basic Network Features The machine supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which network features and connections are supported by each operating system. Operating Systems Windows Windows Server Printing Yes Scanning Yes Yes PC Fax Send (available for certain models) Yes Yes PC Fax Receive (available for certain models) Yes Web Based Management 1 Yes Status Monitor Yes Driver Deployment Wizard Yes 1 Yes macOS Yes Yes Yes Yes The default password to manage your machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access. • When connecting your machine to an outside network such as the Internet, make sure your network environment is protected by a separate firewall or other means in order to prevent information leaks due to inadequate settings or unauthorised access by malicious third parties. • When your machine is connected to the global network, a warning appears. When you see this warning, we strongly recommend confirming your network settings, and then re-connecting to a secure network. • Enabling your machine's global network communication filtering feature blocks access from the global network. The global network communication filtering feature may prevent the machine from receiving certain print or scan jobs from a computer or mobile device that uses a global IP address. Related Information • Network Related Topics: • Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management 271 Home > Network > Configure Network Settings Configure Network Settings • Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management 272 Home > Network > Configure Network Settings > Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel To configure the machine for your network, use the control panel's [Network] menu selections. • For information about the network settings you can configure using the control panel, see Related Information: Settings Tables. • You can also use Web Based Management, to configure and change your machine's network settings. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the network option you want, and then press it. Repeat this step until you access the menu you want to configure, and then follow the LCD instructions. Related Information • Configure Network Settings Related Topics: • Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) • Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW) • Supported Basic Network Features 273 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Settings Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Use the Wireless Network • Use Wi-Fi Direct® • Enable/Disable Wireless LAN • Print the WLAN Report 274 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network Use the Wireless Network Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast • Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network 275 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910: The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following: • If you are using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password. • To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place your machine as close to the wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between the two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your documents. Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics, you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB for the fastest throughput speed. • Although your machine can be used in a wired and wireless network (supported models only), only one connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used at the same time. • If there is a signal in the vicinity, wireless LAN allows you to freely make a LAN connection. However, if security settings are not correctly configured, the signal may be intercepted by malicious third-parties, possibly resulting in: - Theft of personal or confidential information - Improper transmission of information to parties impersonating the specified individuals - Dissemination of transcribed communication contents that were intercepted Make sure you know your wireless router/access point's Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password). If you cannot find this information, consult the manufacturer of your wireless router/access point, your system administrator, or Internet provider. Brother cannot provide this information. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network 276 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. 1. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. 2. Start the installer, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Select Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi) or Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi) (Optional), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. You have completed the wireless network setup. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network 277 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration. 1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting. Network Name (SSID) Network Key (Password) For example: Network Name (SSID) HELLO Network Key (Password) 12345 • Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports the use of only the first WEP key. • If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother customer service, make sure you have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating this information. • If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue with the wireless setup. How can I find this information? a. Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router. b. The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name. c. If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or your Internet provider. 2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi Network]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes]. This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No]. 278 4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. If a list of SSIDs is displayed, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to connect, and then press the SSID. 5. Press [OK]. 6. Do one of the following: • If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network Key you wrote down in the first step. When you have entered all the characters, press [OK]. • If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step. 7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected. If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and then press . You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network Related Topics: • How to Enter Text on Your Machine • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes 279 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from your machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/Push Button]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes]. This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No]. 3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then press [OK].], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your wireless network. If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and then press . You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network Related Topics: • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes 280 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN) Method to configure your wireless network settings. The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance®. By submitting a PIN created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the instructions provided with your wireless access point/router. Type A Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as the Registrar: 1 Type B Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as the Registrar: 281 2 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/PIN Code]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes]. This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No]. 3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router. 4. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2). 5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions. • The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router. • The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router. If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps: 6. Do one of the following: • Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device. • Windows 10 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device. • To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/ router. • If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. 7. Select your machine and click Next. 8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next. 9. Click Close. 282 If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and then press . You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network Related Topics: • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes 283 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration. 1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings. Network Name (SSID) Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key Open System NONE - WEP Shared Key WEP WPA/WPA2-PSK AES TKIP WPA3-SAE AES For example: Network Name (SSID) HELLO Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key WPA2-PSK AES 12345678 If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only. 2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi Network]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes]. This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No]. 4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK]. 5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK]. 6. Select the Authentication Method. 7. Do one of the following: 284 • If you selected the [Open System] option, press the Encryption type [None] or [WEP]. If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK]. • If you selected the [Shared Key] option, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK]. • If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES]. Enter the WPA™ key, and then press [OK]. • If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [AES]. Enter the WPA™ key, and then press [OK]. Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only. 8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected. If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and then press . You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network Related Topics: • I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration • How to Enter Text on Your Machine • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes 285 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration. 1. Check and record the current wireless network settings. Network Name (SSID) Authentication Method Encryption Mode EAP-FAST/NONE AES User ID Password TKIP EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES TKIP EAP-FAST/GTC AES TKIP PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES TKIP PEAP/GTC AES TKIP EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES TKIP EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP AES TKIP EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2 AES TKIP EAP-TTLS/PAP AES TKIP EAP-TLS AES - TKIP - For example: Network Name (SSID) HELLO Authentication Method Encryption Mode User ID Password EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 AES Brother 12345678 286 • If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to use. • If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the common name of the server certificate. 2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi Network]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes]. This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No]. 4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK]. 5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK]. 6. Select the Authentication Method. 7. Do one of the following: • If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, select the Inner Authentication method [NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [GTC] or [PAP]. Depending on your Authentication method, the Inner Authentication method selections may differ. Select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES]. Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID]. - If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID, and password (if required), and then press [OK] for each option. - For other selections, enter the user ID and Password, and then press [OK] for each option. If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification]. • If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES]. The machine will display a list of available Client Certificates, and then select the certificate. Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID]. - If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK] for each option. - For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK]. 8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected. If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Press [OK], and then press . You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads. Related Information • Use the Wireless Network Related Topics: • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes 287 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct® Use Wi-Fi Direct® Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Wi-Fi Direct Overview • Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually • Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method 288 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct® > Wi-Fi Direct Overview Wi-Fi Direct Overview Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance®. It allows you to securely connect your mobile device to your machine without using a wireless router/access point. 1 2 1. Mobile device 2. Your machine • You can use Wi-Fi Direct with the wired or wireless network connection at the same time. • The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner. When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct network, the Group Owner serves as an access point. Related Information • Use Wi-Fi Direct® Related Topics: • Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually • Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method 289 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the machine's control panel: When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to connect. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. The machine will display the SSID (Network Name) and Password (Network Key). Go to your mobile device's wireless network settings screen, select the SSID, and then enter the password. 3. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Related Information • Use Wi-Fi Direct® Related Topics: • Wi-Fi Direct Overview • Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method 290 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to connect. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button] on your machine's LCD. • If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, do the following: a. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Owner], and then press [On]. b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [Push Button]. • If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. When the [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] message appears, turn your mobile device‘s Wi-Fi Direct function on (for more information, see your mobile device’s user‘s guide). Press [OK] on your machine. 3. Do one of the following: • If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine. • If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile device. To search for available devices again press [Rescan]. 4. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. Related Information • Use Wi-Fi Direct® Related Topics: • Wi-Fi Direct Overview • Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually 291 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Enable/Disable Wireless LAN Enable/Disable Wireless LAN Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option. Press [WLAN Enable]. 3. Do one of the following: • To enable Wi-Fi, select [On]. • To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off]. 4. Press . Related Information • Wireless Network Settings 292 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report Print the WLAN Report Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. The WLAN Report shows your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code on the printed report. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Yes]. The machine will print the WLAN Report. 3. Press . If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one minute and then try to print the report again. Related Information • Wireless Network Settings • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes Related Topics: • My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network • I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly 293 Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error Codes Wireless LAN Report Error Codes Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see the corresponding instructions in the table: Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions TS-01 The WLAN (Wi-Fi) is not enabled. Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again: TS-02 • Enable the WLAN setting on your machine. • If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it. The wireless router/access point cannot be detected. Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again: TS-03 • Make sure the wireless router/access point is on. • Temporarily place your machine closer to the wireless router/access point when you are configuring the wireless settings. • If your wireless router/access point is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC address of the machine is allowed in the filter. You can find the MAC address by printing the Network Configuration Report. • If you manually entered the Network Name (SSID) and security information (authentication method/encryption method), the information may be incorrect. Check the Network Name and security information again and re-enter the correct information. • Restart your wireless router/access point. If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider. The wireless enterprise network and security settings you entered may be incorrect. Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again: Verify the following information: - Network Name (SSID) you selected to configure your machine. - Security information you selected to configure your machine (such as the authentication method, encryption method, or User ID). If you still cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider. 294 Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions TS-04 Your machine does not support the authentication and encryption methods used by the selected wireless router/access point. For infrastructure mode (Most common) Change the authentication and encryption methods of the wireless router/access point. Your machine supports the following authentication and encryption methods: • WPA-Personal: TKIP / AES • WPA2-Personal: TKIP / AES • WPA3-Personal: AES • OPEN: WEP / NONE (without encryption) • Shared key: WEP If your issue is not resolved, the Network Name (SSID) or security settings you entered may be incorrect. Check that all wireless network settings are correct for your network. TS-05 The Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password) are incorrect. Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again: TS-06 • Confirm the Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password). • If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them correctly. • If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider. • If your wireless router/access point uses WEP encryption with multiple WEP keys, write down and use only the first WEP key. The wireless security information (authentication method/encryption method/Network Key (Password)) is incorrect. Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again: • Confirm the Network Key. If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them correctly. • Confirm whether the authentication method entered and the authentication method or encryption method supported by the wireless router/access point are the same. • If the Network key, authentication method, and encryption method have been confirmed, restart your wireless router/access point and the machine. • If your wireless router/access point's Stealth Mode is on, you may need to disable it to connect to the wireless network. If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider. TS-07 The machine cannot detect a wireless router/access point that has WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) enabled. Check the following points and try again: • To check if your wireless router/access point supports WPS, look for the WPS symbol displayed on the router/access point. For more information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point. • To set up your wireless connection using WPS, you must configure both your machine and the wireless router/access point. For more information, see the user's guide. • If you do not know how to set up your wireless router/access point using WPS, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider. 295 Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions TS-08 Two or more wireless routers or access points that have WPS enabled are detected. Check the following points and try again: • Make sure that only one wireless router/access point within range has WPS enabled, and then try to connect again. • Try to connect again after a few minutes to avoid interference from other access points/ routers. How to confirm wireless security information (SSID/authentication method/encryption method/Network Key) of your WLAN access point/router: 1. The default security settings may be provided on a label attached to the WLAN access point/router. Or the manufacturer's name or model number of the WLAN access point/router may be used as the default security settings. 2. See the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router for information on how to find the security settings. • If the WLAN access point/router is set to not broadcast the SSID, the SSID will not automatically be detected. You will have to manually enter the SSID name. • The Network Key may also be described as the Password, Security Key, or Encryption Key. If you do not know the SSID and wireless security settings of your WLAN access point/router or how to change the configuration, see the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the manufacturer of your access point/router or ask your Internet provider or network administrator. Related Information • Print the WLAN Report Related Topics: • My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network • I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast • Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network 296 Home > Network > Network Features Network Features • Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel • Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management • Print the Network Configuration Report • Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management • Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) • Use the Send Fax to Server Feature • Configure and Operate LDAP Search • Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management • Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) • Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination • Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings 297 Home > Network > Network Features > Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Based Mgmt]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press to select the option you want. If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management. Related Information • Network Features Related Topics: • Print an Email Attachment 298 Home > Network > Network Features > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured using Web Based Management: • Proxy server address • Port number • User Name • Password • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Make sure the Proxy checkbox is selected, and then click Submit. 6. In the Proxy field, click Advanced Settings. 7. Enter the proxy server information. 8. Click Submit. Related Information • Network Features Related Topics: • Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management • Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel 299 Home > Network > Network Features > Print the Network Configuration Report Print the Network Configuration Report The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings. • The Node Name appears on the Network Configuration Report. The default Node Name is "BRN123456abcdef" for a wired network or "BRW123456abcdef" for a wireless network (where "123456abcdef" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.) • If the IP Address on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try printing it again. • You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC Address on the report, for example: - IP address: 192.168.0.5 - Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 - Node name: BRN000ca0000499 - MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Yes]. 3. Press . Related Information • Network Features Related Topics: • Check Your Machine's Network Settings • Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) • Error Messages • I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly • Access Web Based Management • Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management 300 Home > Network > Network Features > Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management Configure PC-FAX Receive Using Web Based Management Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use Web Based Management to configure your PC Fax Receiving in a web browser. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the PC Fax Receive checkbox, and then click Submit. 6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration. Related Information • Network Features Related Topics: • Run Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) 301 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 With Internet Fax (I-Fax), you can send and receive fax documents using the Internet. Documents are transmitted in email messages as attached TIFF-F files. Your computer can send and receive documents as long as it has an application that can create and view TIFF-F files. You can use any TIFF-F viewer application. Documents sent via the machine will be converted into a TIFF‑F format automatically. To send and receive messages to and from your machine, your computer's email application must support Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). 4 4 1 2 4 3 3 1. Sender 2. Internet 3. Receiver 4. Email server I-Fax supports sending and receiving documents in Letter or A4 format and in monochrome only. Related Information • Network Features • Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax) • Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) • Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax) • Poll the Server Manually • I-Fax Options Related Topics: • Forward Received Email and Fax Messages 302 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax) Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 I-Fax communication on a LAN is very similar to communication via email; however, it is different from fax communication using standard phone lines. Make sure you read the following information about using I-Fax: • Factors such as the receiver's location, structure of the LAN and how busy the circuit (such as the Internet) is may cause the system to take longer than usual to send an error mail. • When sending confidential documents, we recommend using standard phone lines instead of the Internet (due to its low level of security). • If the receiver's mail system is not MIME-compatible, you cannot use I-Fax to send documents. If possible, check this in advance, and note that some servers will not send an error reply. • If a document is too large to send via I-Fax, it may not reach the receiver. • You cannot change the font or size of the text in any Internet mail you receive. Related Information • Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) 303 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) Before using I-Fax, configure your Brother machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You can configure these items using the machine's control panel or Web Based Management. Make sure the following items are configured on your machine: • IP address (If you are already using your machine on your network, the machine's IP address has been configured correctly.) • Email address • SMTP, POP3, IMAP4 server address/port/Authentication method/Encryption method/Server Certificate Verification • Mailbox name and password If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator. Related Information • Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) • Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) • How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer Related Topics: • I-Fax Options 304 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) Before sending your I-Fax, use the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional items: • E-mail Subject • E-mail Message • Size Limit • Request Delivery Notification (Send) If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator. Related Information • Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) • How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax) 305 Related Topics: • Forward Received Email and Fax Messages 306 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax) How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When your Brother machine receives an incoming I-Fax, it will print the I-Fax automatically. To receive an IFax, we recommend using the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional items: • Auto Polling • Polling Frequency • Print Mail Header • Delete/Read Receive Error Mail • Send Delivery Notification (Receive) There are two ways you can receive email messages: • POP3/IMAP4 receiving at regular intervals 307 • POP3/IMAP4 receiving, manually initiated When using POP3/IMAP4 receiving, the machine polls your email server to receive data. Polling can occur at set intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the email server every ten minutes) or you can manually poll the server. • If your machine starts to receive email data, the LCD displays [Receiving].The email will be printed automatically. • If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is reloaded in the paper tray. • When the machine's Temporary Fax Backup Function is turned on, received data will be stored for a certain period of time. • If the received mail is not in a plain text format, or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the error message "ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED." will be printed. • If the received mail is too large, the error message "E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE." will be printed. • If Delete/Read Receive Error Mail is On (default), then the error mail will be deleted from the email server automatically. Related Information • Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) Related Topics: • How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer • Forward Received Email and Fax Messages 308 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When a computer receives an I-Fax document, the document is attached to an email message that notifies you in its Subject field that your email server has received an I-Fax. You can either wait for your Brother machine to poll the email server, or you can manually poll the email server to receive the incoming data. Related Information • Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) Related Topics: • How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax) 309 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax) Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Sending an I-Fax is like sending a normal fax. Make sure that your recipient's information is saved in your email address book, and load the document you want to I-Fax into your Brother machine. • If the computer to which you want to send a document is not running Windows Server 2012/2012 R2/2016/2019/2022, Windows 10 or Windows 11, ask the computer's owner to install software that can view TIFF files. • To send multiple pages, use the ADF. 1. Load your document. 2. Do one of the following: • If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax]. • If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes]. 3. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options]. (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options]. 4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the fax settings. When the setting you want appears, press it and select your preference. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 5. Do one of the following: , enter the email address using the touchscreen, and then press [OK]. • Press • Press [Address Book], select the email address of your recipient, and then press [Apply]. 6. Press [Fax Start]. The machine starts scanning. After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the recipient via your SMTP server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing during scanning. 7. Press . Related Information • Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) 310 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Poll the Server Manually Poll the Server Manually Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail] > [Manual Receive]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Yes] to confirm. 3. The LCD displays [Receiving] and your machine will print the data from the email server. Related Information • Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) 311 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options I-Fax Options Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Forward Received Email and Fax Messages • Relay Broadcast • Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail • Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) 312 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Forward Received Email and Fax Messages Forward Received Email and Fax Messages Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use Brother's I-Fax feature to forward email or standard fax messages to another computer, to a fax machine, or to another I-Fax machine. Enable the Forwarding feature using your machine's control panel. To enable email forwarding using your machine's control panel: 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] > [Fax Forward]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Do one of the following: • Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD. Press [OK]. • Press [Address Book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want your faxes to be forwarded. Press the fax number or email address you want. 3. If you select the email address, select the file type you want. Press [Backup Print: On] to print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy. 4. Press . Related Information • I-Fax Options Related Topics: • Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) • Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) • How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax) 313 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay Broadcast Relay Broadcast Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 A Relay Broadcast is when your Brother machine receives a message over the Internet and then relays it to another fax machine using conventional telephone lines. If you must fax a document over a long distance or abroad, use the Relay Broadcast Function to save the communication fee. 1 3 3 2 1. The Internet 2. Telephone line 3. Email server Use the Brother machine's control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following items: • Relay Broadcast Function Set the Relay Broadcast Function to On. • Relay Domain Configure your machine's domain name on the machine that will broadcast the document to the conventional fax machine. If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the trusted domain name (the portion of the name after the "@" sign) at the machine. Use care in selecting a trusted domain: any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a relay broadcast. You can register up to ten domain names. • Relay Broadcast Report Specify whether or not you want a report to print after the machine completes the relay broadcast. 314 Related Information • I-Fax Options • Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine • Relay Broadcast from Your Computer 315 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your machine to a conventional fax machine. Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit, and then restart your machine. [email protected] [email protected] r 123456789 1 [email protected](fax#123456789) 1. The Internet In this example, your machine's email address is [email protected] and you want to send a document from your machine to a standard fax machine in England with the email address [email protected], and you want your machine to send the document using a conventional telephone line. 1. Load your document. 2. Do one of the following: • If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax]. • If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes]. 3. (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Press [Options].(MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Press [Options]. 4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Broadcasting] option. 5. Press [Broadcasting]. 6. Press [Add Number]. 7. You can add email addresses to the broadcast in the following ways: • Press [Add Number] and press • Press [Add from Address book]. Press the checkbox of the email address you want to add to the broadcast. After you have selected all the email addresses you want, press [OK]. • Press [Search in Address book]. Enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK]. The search results will be displayed. Press the name and then press the email address you want to add to the broadcast. , enter the email address and press [OK]. The following is an example of how to enter the email address and phone number: 316 [email protected](fax#123456789) Fax Phone Number email address The word "fax#" must be included with the phone number inside the parenthesis. After you have entered all of the fax numbers, press [OK]. If your machine displays , press it. 8. Press [Fax Start]. Related Information • Relay Broadcast 317 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Relay Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Computer Relay Broadcast from Your Computer Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your computer to a conventional fax machine. • Some email applications do not support sending an email to multiple fax numbers. If your email application cannot support multiple fax numbers, you can relay to only one fax machine at a time. [email protected] 123456789 1 [email protected](fax#123456789) 1. The Internet • Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit, and then restart your machine. If you are sending an email to a conventional fax machine, the method of entering the fax machine's fax number will vary, depending on the mail application you are using. 1. In your email application, create a new email message and type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the first fax machine in the "TO" box. The following is an example of how to enter the email address and fax number: [email protected](fax#123456789) Fax Phone Number email address The word "fax#" must be included with the phone number inside the parenthesis. For Microsoft Outlook, the address information must be entered into the address book as follows: Name: fax#123456789 Email address: [email protected] 2. Type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the second fax machine in the "TO" box. 3. Send the email. Related Information • Relay Broadcast 318 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (IFax) Verification Mail Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Verification Mail for sending allows you to request notification from the receiving station where your I-Fax or email was received and processed. • Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or email. To use this feature, set the [Notification] options in the [Setup Mail RX] and [Setup Mail TX] options of your machine's control panel menu. Related Information • I-Fax Options • Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail • Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail • I-Fax Error Mail 319 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (IFax) Verification Mail > Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail TX] > [Notification]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Select [On] or [Off] to enable or disable the Send Notification feature. When Send Notification is On, the fax includes an additional field, named Message Disposition Notification (MDN), that contains message delivery information. By default, Send Notification is set to Off. Your fax recipient's machine must support the MDN field in order to send a notification report. 3. Press . Related Information • Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail 320 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (IFax) Verification Mail > Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail RX] > [Notification]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press one of the three possible settings: Option Description Receive Notification On When Receive Notification is set to On, a template is sent back to the sender to indicate successful receipt and processing of the message. These templates depend on the operation requested by the sender. Example: SUCCESS : Received From <Mail Address> Receive Notification MDN When Receive Notification is set to MDN, a report to indicate successful receipt and processing is sent back to the sender if the originating station sent a request confirmation to the MDN (Message Disposition Notification) field. Receive Notification Off When Receive Notification is set to Off, all forms of receipt notification are disabled and no message is sent back to the sender regardless of the request. • • To send TX Verification Mail, the Sender must configure these settings: - Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail TX] to [On]. - Switch [Header] in [Setup Mail RX] to [All] or [Subject+From+To]. To receive TX Verification Mail, the Receiver must configure these settings: Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail RX] to [On]. 3. Press . Related Information • Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail 321 Home > Network > Network Features > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (IFax) Verification Mail > I-Fax Error Mail I-Fax Error Mail Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If there is a delivery error while sending an I-Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the Brother machine and the error message will be printed. If there is an error while receiving an I-Fax, an error message will be printed, for example, "The message being sent to the machine was not in a TIFF format." To receive the error mail and have these printed on your machine, in [Setup Mail RX], switch the [Header] option to [All] or to [Subject+From+To]. Related Information • Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail 322 Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature Use the Send Fax to Server Feature Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 The Fax to Server feature allows the machine to scan a document and send it over the network to a separate fax server. The document will then be sent from the server as fax data to the destination fax number over standard phone lines. When the Fax to Server feature is set to On, all automatic fax transmissions from the machine will be sent to the fax server for fax transmission. You can send a fax directly from the machine using the manual fax feature when the Send to Server feature is on. Related Information • Network Features • Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server • Enable Fax to Server • Operate Fax to Server 323 Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 To send a document to the fax server, the correct syntax for that server must be used. The destination fax number must be sent with a prefix and a suffix that match the parameters used by the fax server. In most cases, the syntax for the prefix is “fax=” and the syntax for the suffix would be the domain name of the fax server email gateway. The suffix must also include the “@” symbol at the beginning of the suffix. The prefix and the suffix information must be stored in the machine before you can use the Fax to Server function. Destination fax numbers can be saved in the address book or entered using the dial pad (up to 40-digit numbers). For example: if you wanted to send a document to a destination fax number of 123-555-0001, use the following syntax: Your fax server application must support an email gateway. Related Information • Use the Send Fax to Server Feature 324 Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Enable Fax to Server Enable Fax to Server Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Store the prefix/suffix address for the fax server in your Brother machine. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Fax to Server]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Fax to Server]. 3. Press [On]. 4. Press [Prefix]. 5. Enter the prefix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK]. 6. Press [Suffix]. 7. Enter the suffix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK]. 8. Press . Related Information • Use the Send Fax to Server Feature 325 Home > Network > Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Operate Fax to Server Operate Fax to Server Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Place the document in the ADF or on the scanner glass. 2. Do one of the following: • If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off], press [Fax]. • If the Fax Preview option is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Faxes]. 3. Enter the fax number. 4. Press [Fax Start]. The machine will send the message over a TCP/IP network to the fax server. Related Information • Use the Send Fax to Server Feature 326 Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search Configure and Operate LDAP Search DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910: standard The LDAP feature allows you to search for information, such as fax numbers and email addresses, on your server. When you use the Fax, I-Fax, or Scan to Email server feature, you can use the LDAP search to find fax numbers or email addresses. • The LDAP feature does not support simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, or Korean. • The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3. • The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS. Related Information • Network Features • Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management • Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel 327 Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management Use Web Based Management to configure your LDAP settings in a web browser. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the LDAP checkbox, and then click Submit. 6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration. 7. On your computer, in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book > LDAP. • LDAP Search • LDAP Server Address • SSL/TLS • Port (The default port number is 389.) • Authentication • Username This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used. • Password This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used. • - If the LDAP server supports Kerberos authentication, we recommend selecting Kerberos for the Authentication settings. It provides strong authentication between the LDAP server and your machine. - You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication. Kerberos Server Address This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used. • Search Root • Attribute of Card ID (Search Key) • Attribute of Name • Timeout for LDAP • Attribute of Name (Search Key) • Attribute of E-mail • Attribute of Fax Number • Optional Attribute 8. When finished, click Submit. Make sure the Status field reads OK. 328 Related Information • Configure and Operate LDAP Search Related Topics: • Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management 329 Home > Network > Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel When you have configured LDAP settings, you can use the LDAP search feature to find fax numbers or email addresses to use for: • Sending a Fax (not available for DCP models) • Sending an Internet Fax (I-Fax) (not available for DCP models) • Scanning to Email Server • The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3. • The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS. • You may need to use Kerberos Authentication or Simple Authentication to connect to your LDAP server, depending on the security policy set by your network administrator. • You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication. 1. Press to search. 2. Enter the initial characters for your search using the LCD. 3. Press [OK]. The LDAP search result will be shown on the LCD; the icon appears before the fax number (local) or the email (local) address book search results. If there is no match on the server or in the local address book, the LCD displays [Results cannot be found.] for about 60 seconds. 4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the name you want. 5. Press the name. To view the details of the name, press [Detail]. 6. If the result includes more than one fax number or email address, the machine will prompt you to select just one. Press [Apply]. Do one of the following: • If you are sending a fax or an I-Fax, press [Fax Start]. • If you are scanning to the Email Server, load your document, press [Next], and then press [Start]. Related Information • Configure and Operate LDAP Search Related Topics: • Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management 330 Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronise the time used by the machine for authentication with the SNTP time server. (This is not the time displayed on the machine's LCD.) You can automatically or manually synchronise the machine's time with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided by the SNTP time server. • Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management • Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management • Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management • Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel 331 Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management Configure the date and time to synchronise the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server. This feature is not available in some countries. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Verify the Time Zone settings. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00. 6. Select the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox. 7. Click Submit. You can also configure date and time manually. Related Information • Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management Related Topics: • Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management 332 Home > Network > Network Features > Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronise the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by the SNTP time server. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the SNTP checkbox to activate the settings. 6. Click Submit. 7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration. 8. Next to the SNTP checkbox, click Advanced Settings. 9. Configure the settings. Option Description Status Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled. Synchronization Status Confirm the latest synchronisation status. SNTP Server Method Select AUTO or STATIC. • AUTO If you have a DHCP server on your network, the SNTP server will obtain the address from that server automatically. • STATIC Type the address you want to use. Primary SNTP Server Address Type the server's address (up to 64 characters). Secondary SNTP Server Address The secondary SNTP server's address is used as a backup to the primary SNTP server's address. If the primary server is unavailable, the machine will contact the secondary SNTP server. Primary SNTP Server Port Type the port number (1-65535). Secondary SNTP Server Port The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary SNTP server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will contact the secondary SNTP port. Synchronization Interval Type the number of hours between server synchronisation attempts (1-168 hours). 10. Click Submit. Related Information • Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management 333 Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network, you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based Management (web browser). Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable. The machine can automatically negotiate the highest supported network speed, for example: to achieve 1000BASE-T network speeds, all connecting infrastructure, including network switches and cables must also support 1000BASE-T speeds. Otherwise the machine will communicate at either 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. Related Information • Network Features • Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management 334 Home > Network > Network Features > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) > Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Wired > Ethernet. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list. 6. Click Submit. 7. To activate the settings, click Yes to restart your machine. You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report. Related Information • Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) Related Topics: • Print the Network Configuration Report 335 Home > Network > Network Features > Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Set up a profile to forward incoming faxes directly to a folder on an FTP, SFTP, CIFS, or SharePoint server. • • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Network Profile. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the FTP, SFTP, Network, or SharePoint option, and then click Submit. 6. Set up the profile for your server, using one of the following tables: Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error. FTP Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189). Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default setting is port 21. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the FTP server. Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. SSL/TLS Set the SSL/TLS option to forward securely using SSL/TLS communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed. 336 Option Description Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the FTP server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc). Passive Mode Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. SFTP Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Host Address Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189). Username Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the SFTP server. Auth. Method Select Password or Public Key. Password When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Client Key Pair When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the authentication type. Server Public Key Select the authentication type. Store Directory Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc). Port Number Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed. Network Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. Network Folder Path Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Username Type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, type the user name in one of the following styles: user@domain domain\user Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters). 337 You must configure the SNTP (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel. The time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server. SharePoint Option Description Profile Name Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD. SharePoint Site Address Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared %20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx). SSL/TLS If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://", you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server Certificate checkbox. Auth. Method To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or Basic. If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected automatically. Username Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles: • user@domain • domain\user Password Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field. Kerberos Server Address When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters). 7. Click Submit. 8. To set the Fax Forward feature, go to the navigation menu, and then click Fax > Remote Fax Options. 9. Select Forward to Network from the Fwd/Store/Cloud/Network drop-down list. 10. Select the file type you want to use. 11. To print a backup copy of incoming faxes, select On for Backup print. 12. Select the profile you want to use from the Network Profile drop-down list. 13. Type a three-digit Remote Access Code in the Remote Access Code field, if needed. • You can use the numbers 0 through 9, *, or # for the Remote Access Code. • The Remote Access Code must be different from the remote codes for the Fax features. 14. Click Submit. Related Information • Memory Receive Options • Network Features 338 Home > Network > Network Features > Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings You can use your machine's control panel to reset the machine's network settings to its default factory settings. This resets all information, such as the password and IP address. • This feature restores all network settings to the factory settings. • You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using Web Based Management. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.] appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm. The machine will restart. Related Information • Network Features Related Topics: • Reset Your Machine 339 Home > Security Security • Before Using Network Security Features • Configure Certificates for Device Security • Use SSL/TLS • Use SNMPv3 • Use IPsec • Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network • Use Active Directory Authentication • Use LDAP Authentication • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 • Send or Receive an Email Securely • Store Print Log to Network • Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel • Use Global Network Detection Features 340 Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features Before Using Network Security Features Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent unauthorised access to the machine. We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these protocols is not secure. Related Information • Security • Network Security • Disable Unnecessary Protocols 341 Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features > Disable Unnecessary Protocols Disable Unnecessary Protocols 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Clear any unnecessary protocol checkboxes to disable them. 6. Click Submit. 7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration. Related Information • Before Using Network Security Features 342 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security Configure Certificates for Device Security You must configure a certificate to manage your networked machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must use Web Based Management to configure a certificate. • Supported Security Certificate Features • How to Create and Install a Certificate • Create a Self-signed Certificate • Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) • Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key • Import and Export a CA Certificate • Manage Multiple Certificates 343 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Supported Security Certificate Features Supported Security Certificate Features Your machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management, authentication, and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with the machine: • SSL/TLS communication • SSL communication for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (only available for certain models) • IEEE 802.1x authentication • IPsec Your machine supports the following: • Pre-installed certificate Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS communication without creating or installing a different certificate. The pre-installed self-signed certificate protects your communication up to a certain level. We recommend using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organisation for better security. • Self-signed certificate This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA. • Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA: • - When using a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from this print server. - When importing a certificate and a private key. Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network. • If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator first. • When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them. Related Information • Configure Certificates for Device Security 344 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > How to Create and Install a Certificate How to Create and Install a Certificate There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA). Option 1 Self-Signed Certificate 1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management. 2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer. Option 2 Certificate from a CA 1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management. 2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management. 3. Install the certificate on your computer. Related Information • Configure Certificates for Device Security 345 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Self-signed Certificate Create a Self-signed Certificate 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate. 6. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date. • The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node name is displayed by default. • A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate. 7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit). 8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256. 9. Click Submit. Related Information • Configure Certificates for Device Security 346 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) If you already have a certificate from an external trusted Certificate Authority (CA) , you can store the certificate and private key on the machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate from an external trusted CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and install the returned certificate on your machine. • Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) • Install a Certificate on Your Machine 347 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the credentials contained within the certificate. We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Create CSR. 6. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional). • Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside world. • The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required. • A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for the certificate. • The length of the Organization, the Organization Unit, the City/Locality, and the State/Province must be less than 64 bytes. • The Country/Region should be a two-character ISO 3166 country code. • If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition checkbox, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual. 7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit). 8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256. 9. Click Submit. The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form offered by a Certificate Authority. 10. Click Save. 348 • Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA. • If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server 2012/2012 R2/2016/2019/2022, we recommend using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If you are creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we recommend using User for the certificate template. Related Information • Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) 349 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Install a Certificate on Your Machine Install a Certificate on Your Machine When you receive a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA), follow the steps below to install it on the print server: Only a certificate issued with your machine's Certificate Signing Request (CSR) can be installed on your machine. When you want to create another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating the new CSR. Create another CSR only after installing the certificate on the machine, otherwise the CSR created before installing the new CSR will be invalid. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Install Certificate. 6. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit. The certificate has been created and saved in your machine's memory successfully. To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact your network administrator. Related Information • Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) 350 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them. • Import a Certificate and Private Key • Export the Certificate and Private Key 351 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key > Import a Certificate and Private Key Import a Certificate and Private Key 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Import Certificate and Private Key. 6. Browse to the file you want to import. 7. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit. The certificate and private key are imported to your machine. Related Information • Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key 352 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key > Export the Certificate and Private Key Export the Certificate and Private Key 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Export shown with Certificate List. 6. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file. If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted. 7. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit. 8. Click Save. The certificate and private key are exported to your computer. You can also import the certificate to your computer. Related Information • Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key 353 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate Import and Export a CA Certificate You can import, export, and store CA certificates on your Brother machine. • Import a CA Certificate • Export a CA Certificate 354 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Import a CA Certificate Import a CA Certificate 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click Import CA Certificate. 6. Browse to the file you want to import. 7. Click Submit. Related Information • Import and Export a CA Certificate 355 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate > Export a CA Certificate Export a CA Certificate 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export. 6. Click Submit. 7. Click b next to Save, and then specify the location where you want to save the file. Related Information • Import and Export a CA Certificate 356 Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security > Manage Multiple Certificates Manage Multiple Certificates The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view certificate content, delete, or export your certificates. Maximum Number of Certificates Stored on Brother Machine Self-signed Certificate or Certificate Issued by a CA 6 CA Certificate 9 We recommend storing fewer certificates than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration. When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate. This ensures that you avoid configuration failure. • When you use HTTPS/IPPS, IEEE 802.1x, or Signed PDF, you must select which certificate you are using. • When you use SSL for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 communications (only available for certain models), you do not have to choose the certificate. The necessary certificate will be chosen automatically. Related Information • Configure Certificates for Device Security 357 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS Use SSL/TLS • Introduction to SSL/TLS • Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS • Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS • Send or Receive an Email Securely 358 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS Introduction to SSL/TLS Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network, so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it. SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such as WPA keys and firewalls. Related Information • Use SSL/TLS • Brief History of SSL/TLS • Benefits of Using SSL/TLS 359 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Brief History of SSL/TLS Brief History of SSL/TLS SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers and servers. SSL is now used with additional applications, such as Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to become a universal solution for online security. Its original design intentions are still being used today by many online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit card numbers, customer records, etc. SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world. Related Information • Introduction to SSL/TLS 360 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Benefits of Using SSL/TLS Benefits of Using SSL/TLS The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by restricting unauthorised users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's most important benefit is that it can be used to print confidential data securely. For example, a Human Resource (HR) Department in a large company may be printing wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read by other network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a page of code and not the actual wage slip. Related Information • Introduction to SSL/TLS 361 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS • Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols • Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS • Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator • Configure Certificates for Device Security 362 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols Configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management before you use SSL/TLS communication. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click HTTP Server Settings. 6. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list. 7. Click Submit. 8. Click Yes to restart your print server. Related Information • Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS 363 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS To manage your network machine securely, use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol. • To use HTTPS protocol, HTTPS must be enabled on your machine. The HTTPS protocol is enabled by default. • You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using Web Based Management. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name). 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS. Related Information • Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS 364 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS > Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator • The following steps are for Microsoft Edge. If you use another web browser, refer to your web browser's documentation or online help for instructions on how to install certificates. • Make sure you have created your self-signed certificate using Web Based Management. 1. Right-click the Microsoft Edge icon, and then click Run as administrator. If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If your connection is not private, click the Advanced button, and then continue to the web page. 4. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 5. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 6. Click Export. 7. To encrypt the output file, type a password in the Enter password field. If the Enter password field is blank, your output file will not be encrypted. 8. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit. 9. Click the downloaded file to open it. 10. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next. 11. Click Next. 12. If required, type a password, and then click Next. 13. Select Place all certificates in the following store, and then click Browse.... 14. Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click OK. 15. Click Next. 16. Click Finish. 17. Click Yes, if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct. 18. Click OK. Related Information • Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS 365 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS • Print Documents Using IPPS • Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols • Configure Certificates for Device Security 366 Home > Security > Use SSL/TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS > Print Documents Using IPPS Print Documents Using IPPS To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Make sure the IPP checkbox is selected. If the IPP checkbox is not selected, select the IPP checkbox, and then click Submit. Restart your machine to activate the configuration. After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, type the password, go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. 6. Click HTTP Server Settings. 7. Select the HTTPS checkbox in the IPP area, and then click Submit. 8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration. Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorised access to the print server. Related Information • Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS 367 Home > Security > Use SNMPv3 Use SNMPv3 • Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 368 Home > Security > Use SNMPv3 > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3 The Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) provides user authentication and data encryption to manage network devices securely. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name). 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings. 6. Configure the SNMP settings. Option Description SNMP v1/v2c read-write access The print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all of your machine's applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not authenticate the user and data will not be encrypted. SNMPv3 readThe print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of write access version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. and v1/v2c readonly access When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access mode, some of your machine's applications that access the print server do not work correctly since they authorise the read-only access of version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend using the SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode. SNMPv3 readwrite access The print server uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print server securely, use this mode. When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following: Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will be restricted. To allow the use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or SNMP v1/v2c readwrite access mode. 7. Click Submit. If your machine displays the protocol setting options, select the options you want. 8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration. Related Information • Use SNMPv3 369 Home > Security > Use IPsec Use IPsec • Introduction to IPsec • Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management • Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management • Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management 370 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Introduction to IPsec Introduction to IPsec IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent data manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried over a network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use. IPsec supports the following functions: • IPsec transmissions According to the IPsec setting conditions, a network-connected computer sends data to and receives data from a specified device using IPsec. When devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are exchanged using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the keys. In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a Virtual Private Network (VPN). For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary: • - A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network. - Your machine is configured for IPsec communication. - The computer connected to your machine is configured for IPsec connections. IPsec settings The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web Based Management. To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network. Related Information • Use IPsec 371 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management The IPsec connection conditions comprise two Template types: Address and IPsec. You can configure up to 10 connection conditions. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Configure the settings. Option Description Status Enable or disable IPsec. Negotiation Mode Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1. IKE is a protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. In the Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is high. In the Aggressive mode, the processing speed is faster than in the Main mode, but the security is lower. All Non-IPsec Traffic Select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets. When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec Traffic. If you select Drop, Web Services cannot be used. Broadcast/Multicast Bypass Select Enabled or Disabled. Protocol Bypass Select the checkboxes for the option or options you want. Rules Select the Enabled checkbox to activate the template. When you select multiple checkboxes, the lower numbered checkboxes have priority if the settings for the selected checkboxes conflict. Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an Address Template, click Add Template. Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an IPsec Template, click Add Template. 6. Click Submit. If the machine must be restarted to activate the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear. If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm your choices and click Submit again. Related Information • Use IPsec Related Topics: • Configure Certificates for Device Security 372 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Address Template. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template. When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be deleted. 6. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears. 7. Configure the settings. Option Description Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters). Local IP Address • IP Address Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address, ALL IPv6 Address, ALL Link Local IPv6, or Custom from the drop-down list. If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box. • IP Address Range Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address range in the text boxes. If the starting and ending IP addresses are not standardised to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is smaller than the starting address, an error will occur. • IP Address / Prefix Specify the IP address using CIDR notation. For example: 192.168.1.1/24 Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.### are valid. Remote IP Address • Any If you select Any, all IP addresses are enabled. • IP Address Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box. • IP Address Range Type the first and last IP addresses for the IP address range. If the first and last IP addresses are not standardised to IPv4 or IPv6, or the last IP address is smaller than the first address, an error will occur. • IP Address / Prefix Specify the IP address using CIDR notation. For example: 192.168.1.1/24 373 Option Description Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.### are valid. 8. Click Submit. When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to activate the configuration. Related Information • Use IPsec 374 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Template. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template. When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be deleted. 6. Click the IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration fields differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) settings you select. 7. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters). 8. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed. 9. Click Submit. Related Information • Use IPsec • IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template • IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template • Manual Settings for an IPsec Template 375 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template Option Description Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters). Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security. The setting items are different depending on the selected template. Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to IKE is carried out. If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv1. Authentication Type • Diffie-Hellman Group This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key. Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14. • Encryption Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. • Hash Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512. • SA Lifetime Specify the IKE SA lifetime. Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte). Encapsulating Security • Protocol Select ESP, AH, or AH+ESP. • - ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so on. - AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and received as plain text. Encryption (Not available for the AH option.) Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. • Hash Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512. None can be selected only when ESP is selected in Protocol. 376 Option Description • SA Lifetime Specify the IKE SA lifetime. Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte). • Encapsulation Mode Select Transport or Tunnel. • Remote Router IP-Address Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel mode is selected. SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key. Select Enabled or Disabled. Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or Certificates. Pre-Shared Key When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another channel. If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters). • Local/ID Type/ID Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID. Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type. If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field. • Remote/ID Type/ID Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID. Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type. If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field. Certificate If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the certificate. You can select only the certificates that were created using the Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security configuration screen. Related Information • Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management 377 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template Option Description Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters). Use Prefixed Template Select Custom, IKEv2 High Security, or IKEv2 Medium Security. The setting items are different depending on the selected template. Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to IKE is carried out. If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv2. Authentication Type • Diffie-Hellman Group This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key. Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14. • Encryption Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. • Hash • SA Lifetime Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512. Specify the IKE SA lifetime. Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte). Encapsulating Security • Protocol Select ESP. ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so on. • Encryption Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. • Hash Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512. • SA Lifetime Specify the IKE SA lifetime. Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte). • Encapsulation Mode • Remote Router IP-Address Select Transport or Tunnel. Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel mode is selected. 378 Option Description SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key. Select Enabled or Disabled. Authentication Method Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key, Certificates, EAP - MD5, or EAP - MS-CHAPv2. EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP. By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key is used for user authentication during each session. The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method: • Mode Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode. • Certificate Select the certificate. • User Name Type the user name (up to 32 characters). • Password Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password must be entered two times for confirmation. Pre-Shared Key When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another channel. If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters). • Local/ID Type/ID Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID. Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type. If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field. • Remote/ID Type/ID Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID. Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type. If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field. Certificate If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the certificate. 379 Option Description You can select only the certificates that were created using the Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security configuration screen. Related Information • Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management 380 Home > Security > Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > Manual Settings for an IPsec Template Manual Settings for an IPsec Template Option Description Template Name Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters). Use Prefixed Template Select Custom. Internet Key Exchange (IKE) IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to IKE is carried out. Select Manual. Authentication Key (ESP, AH) Type the In/Out values. These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange (IKE), and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for Encapsulating Security section. The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Hash in the Encapsulating Security section. If the length of the specified authentication key is different than the selected hash algorithm, an error will occur. • MD5: 128 bits (16 bytes) • SHA1: 160 bits (20 bytes) • SHA256: 256 bits (32 bytes) • SHA384: 384 bits (48 bytes) • SHA512: 512 bits (64 bytes) When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks ("). Code key (ESP) Type the In/Out values. These settings are necessary when Custom is selected in Use Prefixed Template, Manual is selected in Internet Key Exchange (IKE), and ESP is selected in Protocol in Encapsulating Security. The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Encryption in the Encapsulating Security section. If the length of the specified code key is different than the selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur. • DES: 64 bits (8 bytes) • 3DES: 192 bits (24 bytes) • AES-CBC 128: 128 bits (16 bytes) • AES-CBC 256: 256 bits (32 bytes) When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks ("). SPI These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a host has multiple Security Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the applicable SA when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies the SA, is included in the Authentication Header (AH) and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header. 381 Option Description These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use Prefixed Template, and Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange (IKE). Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters) Encapsulating Security • Protocol Select ESP or AH. • - ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so on. - AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation of the data (ensures the completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and received as plain text. Encryption (Not available for the AH option.) Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. • Hash Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512. None can be selected only when ESP is selected in Protocol. • SA Lifetime Specify the IKE SA lifetime. Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte). • Encapsulation Mode Select Transport or Tunnel. • Remote Router IP-Address Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel mode is selected. SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically. Related Information • Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management 382 Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network • What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? • Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser) • IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods 383 Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication? IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that limits access from unauthorised network devices. Your Brother machine sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication server) through your access point or hub. After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your machine can access the network. Related Information • Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network 384 Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser) Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser) • If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to use. • Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm whether a CA certificate import is necessary. You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using the Wireless Setup Wizard from the control panel (Wireless network). 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Do one of the following: • For the wired network Click Wired > Wired 802.1x Authentication. • For the wireless network Click Wireless > Wireless (Enterprise). 6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings. • To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on the Wired 802.1x Authentication page. • If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate installed (shown with certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list. • If you select EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA certificate, imported to the machine in advance, issued by the CA that signed the server certificate. 385 Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list: Option Description No Verification The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed. CA Cert. The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate. CA Cert. + ServerID The verification method to check the common name 1 value of the server certificate, in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate. 7. When finished with configuration, click Submit. For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the <Wired IEEE 802.1x> status. Option Description Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful. Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed. Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available. Related Information • Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network Related Topics: • Configure Certificates for Device Security 1 The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID. Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID. 386 Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods EAP-FAST Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key algorithms to achieve a tunnelled authentication process. Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods: • EAP-FAST/NONE • EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2 • EAP-FAST/GTC EAP-MD5 (Wired network) Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for challenge-response authentication. PEAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client. Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications: • PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 • PEAP/GTC EAP-TTLS Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication between the server and the client. Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications: • EAP-TTLS/CHAP • EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP • EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2 • EAP-TTLS/PAP EAP-TLS Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate authentication both at a client and an authentication server. Related Information • Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network 387 Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication Use Active Directory Authentication • Introduction to Active Directory Authentication • Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management • Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication) 388 Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Introduction to Active Directory Authentication Introduction to Active Directory Authentication Active Directory Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password. Active Directory Authentication offers the following features: • Stores incoming print data • Stores incoming fax data • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Obtains the email address from the Active Directory server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an email server. To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting and LDAP + kerberos authentication method. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email address. When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine prints the stored fax data. You can change the Active Directory Authentication settings using Web Based Management. Related Information • Use Active Directory Authentication 389 Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management Active Directory authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction Management. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select Active Directory Authentication. 6. Click Submit. 7. Click Active Directory Authentication. 8. Configure the following settings: Option Description Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax data after you log on to the machine. Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID. Active Directory Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of the Active Directory Server. Active Directory Domain Name Type the Active Directory domain name. Protocol & Authentication Method Select the protocol and authentication method. SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option. LDAP Server Port Type the port number to connect the Active Directory server via LDAP (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method). LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method). Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the Active Directory server (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method). 390 Option Description Get User's Home Directory Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network destination (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method). 9. Click Submit. Related Information • Use Active Directory Authentication 391 Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication) Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication) When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID and password on the machine's control panel. 1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID. 2. Press [OK]. 3. Enter your password. 4. Press [OK]. 5. Press [OK] again. 6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home screen. Related Information • Use Active Directory Authentication 392 Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication Use LDAP Authentication • Introduction to LDAP Authentication • Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management • Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication) 393 Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP Authentication Introduction to LDAP Authentication LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password. LDAP Authentication offers the following features: • Stores incoming print data • Stores incoming fax data • Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an email server. To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email address. When LDAP Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine prints the stored fax data. You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management. Related Information • Use LDAP Authentication 394 Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction Management. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select LDAP Authentication. 6. Click Submit. 7. Click the LDAP Authentication menu. 8. Configure the following settings: Option Description Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax data after you log on to the machine. Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID. LDAP Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ldap.example.com) of the LDAP server. SSL/TLS Select the SSL/TLS option to use LDAP over SSL/TLS. LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number. LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root directory. Attribute of Name (Search Key) Type the attribute you want to use as a search key. Get Mail Address Select this option to obtain the logged user's email address from the LDAP server. Get User's Home Directory Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network destination. 9. Click Submit. Related Information • Use LDAP Authentication 395 Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication) Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication) When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID and password on the machine's control panel. 1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID and Password. 2. Press [OK]. 3. Enter your password. 4. Press [OK]. 5. Press [OK] again. 6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home screen. Related Information • Use LDAP Authentication 396 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your machine. • Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 • Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management • Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 • Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 • Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based Management • Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features • Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel 397 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all of the functions listed here. You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management: • Print Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Brother iPrint&Scan, and Brother Mobile Connect. If you register user login names in advance, the users do not need to enter their passwords when they use the print function. • Copy • Scan Scan includes scan jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect. • Send (supported models only) • Receive (supported models only) • USB Direct Print (supported models only) • Scan to USB (supported models only) • Web Connect (supported models only) • Apps (supported models only) • Page Limits • Page Counters • Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only) If you register user Card IDs in advance, registered users can activate the machine by touching their registered cards to the machine's NFC symbol. Touchscreen LCD models: When Secure Function Lock is enabled, the machine automatically enters Public Mode and some of the machine's functions become restricted to authorised users only. To access the restricted machine functions, press , select your user name, and enter your password. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 398 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction Management. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select Secure Function Lock. 6. Click Submit. 7. Click the Restricted Functions menu. 8. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name. 9. In the Print and the other columns, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed. 10. To configure the maximum page count, select the On checkbox in the Page Limits column, and then type the maximum number in the Max. Pages field. 11. Click Submit. 12. Click the User List menu. 13. In the User List field, type the user name. 14. In the Password field, type a password. The number of characters you can set differs depending on your model. 15. (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) In the E-mail Address field, type the user's email address (available for certain models). 16. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain models). 17. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user. 18. (For MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Select Home Screen from the drop-down list for each user. 19. Click Submit. You can also change the user list lockout settings in the Secure Function Lock menu. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 399 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0 Setting Scan restrictions (for administrators) Secure Function Lock 3.0 allows an administrator to restrict which users are allowed to scan. When the Scan feature is set to Off for the public user setting, only users who have the Scan checkbox selected will be able to scan. Using the Scan feature (for restricted users) • To scan using the machine's control panel: Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel to access Scan mode. • To scan from a computer: Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel before scanning from their computers. If the password is not entered on the machine's control panel, an error message will appear on the user's computer. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 400 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0 Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users. Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode settings. Public Mode includes print jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction Management. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select Secure Function Lock. 6. Click Submit. 7. Click the Restricted Functions menu. 8. In the Public Mode row, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed. 9. Click Submit. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 401 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based Management Configure Personal Home Screen Settings Using Web Based Management Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 As an Administrator, you can specify which tabs users can view on their personal home screens. These tabs provide quick access to users' favourite shortcuts, which they can assign to their personal home screen tabs from the machine's control panel. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction Management. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Select Secure Function Lock. 6. In the Tab Settings field, select Personal for the tab names you want to use as your personal home screen. 7. Click Submit. 8. Click the Restricted Functions menu. 9. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name. 10. Click Submit. 11. Click the User List menu. 12. In the User List field, type the user name. 13. In the Password field, type a password. The number of characters you can set differs depending on the model. 14. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain models). 15. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user. 16. Select the tab name from the Home Screen drop-down list for each user. 17. Click Submit. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 Related Topics: • Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut 402 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen: All Counter Reset Click All Counter Reset, in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter. Export to CSV file Click Export to CSV file, to export the current and last page counter including User List / Restricted Functions information as a CSV file. Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only) Click the User List menu, and then type a user's Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your IC card for authentication. Last Counter Record Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 403 Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Touch the Near-Field Communication (NFC) symbol on the machine with a registered Integrated Circuit Card (IC Card). 2. Touch your user ID on the machine. 3. Press [Register Card]. 4. Touch a new IC Card to the NFC symbol. The new IC Card's number is registered to the machine. For the supported IC Card types, visit support.brother.com and click the FAQs & Troubleshooting page. 5. Press [OK]. Related Information • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 404 Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely Send or Receive an Email Securely • Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management • Send an Email with User Authentication • Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS 405 Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication, or email sending and receiving using SSL/TLS. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of POP3/IMAP4/ SMTP Client is Enabled. 6. Configure the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client settings. • Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email. • If you do not know the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP). 7. When finished, click Submit. The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears. 8. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings. Related Information • Send or Receive an Email Securely 406 Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send an Email with User Authentication Send an Email with User Authentication Your machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user authentication. This method prevents unauthorised users from accessing the email server. You can use the SMTP-AUTH method for email notification, email reports and I-Fax. We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication. Email Server Settings You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server. For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP). To enable SMTP server authentication: in the Web Based Management POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client screen, under Server Authentication Method, you must select SMTP-AUTH. Related Information • Send or Receive an Email Securely 407 Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS Your machine supports SSL/TLS communication methods. To use an email server that is using SSL/TLS communication, you must configure the following settings. We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS. Verify Server Certificate Under SSL/TLS, if you choose SSL or TLS, the Verify Server Certificate checkbox will be selected automatically. • Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary. • If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate checkbox. Port Number If you select SSL, or TLS, the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To change the port number manually, type the port number after you select SSL/TLS settings. You must configure your machine's communication method to match the method used by your email server. For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP. In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings: SMTP POP3 IMAP4 Port 25 Server Authentication Method SMTP-AUTH SSL/TLS TLS Port 995 SSL/TLS SSL Port 993 SSL/TLS SSL Related Information • Send or Receive an Email Securely Related Topics: • Configure Certificates for Device Security 408 Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network Store Print Log to Network • Store Print Log to Network Overview • Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management • Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting • Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0 409 Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Store Print Log to Network Overview Store Print Log to Network Overview The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your machine to a network server using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job, job name, user name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs over TCP/IP, allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet. The following print functions are recorded in the print log: • Print jobs from your computer • USB Direct Print (supported models only) • Copy • Received Fax (supported models only) • Web Connect Print (supported models only) • The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for authentication. • You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server. Related Information • Store Print Log to Network 410 Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. In the Print Log field, click On. 6. Configure the following settings: Option Description Network Folder Path Type the destination folder where your print log will be stored on the CIFS server (for example: \\ComputerName\SharedFolder). File Name Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters). File Type Select the TXT or CSV option for the print log file type. Time Source for Log Select the time source for the print log. Auth. Method Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on. NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows to log into servers. Username • Auto: If you select Auto, NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method. • Kerberos: Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only. • NTLMv2: Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only. • For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure the Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server. • You can also configure the Date & Time settings from the machine's control panel. Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters). If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles: user@domain or domain\user. Password Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters). 411 Option Description Kerberos Server Address (if needed) Type the Key Distribution Center (KDC) host address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.168.56.189). Error Detection Setting Choose what action should be taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server due to a network error. 7. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status. You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine. 8. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page. To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step. To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically. 9. The machine will test your settings. 10. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen. If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again. Related Information • Store Print Log to Network 412 Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server due to a network error. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option. Option Description Cancel Print If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are cancelled when the print log cannot be stored to the server. Even if you select the Cancel Print option, your machine will print a received fax. (For MFC models) Ignore Log & Print If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the print log cannot be stored to the server. When the Store Print Log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows: a. If the print log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the number of printed pages will not be recorded. b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of the job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the print log. 6. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page. To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step. To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically. 7. The machine will test your settings. 8. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen. If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again. 413 Related Information • Store Print Log to Network 414 Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network > Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0 Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0 When Secure Function Lock 3.0 is active, the names of the registered users for copy, Fax RX (for MFC models), Web Connect Print and USB Direct Print (if available) are recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report. When the Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the user name is recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report: Related Information • Store Print Log to Network 415 Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel Before turning the machine's Setting Lock on, write down and save your password. If you forget the password, you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother customer service. • Setting Lock Overview 416 Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview Setting Lock Overview Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorised access to machine settings. When Setting Lock is set to On, you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password. • Set the Setting Lock Password • Change the Setting Lock Password • Turn Setting Lock On • Restrict Specific Machine Settings 417 Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Set the Setting Lock Password Set the Setting Lock Password >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 >> MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter a four-digit number for the password. 3. Press [OK]. 4. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password. 5. Press [OK]. 6. Press . MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Admin Settings]. 2. Type the current Administrator password, and then press [OK]. 3. Press [Password]. 4. Type the current Administrator password again, and then press [OK]. 5. Type the password you want to use (8 to 32 characters), and then press [OK]. This password is also valid for other [Admin Settings] features and Web Based Management login. 6. When the LCD displays [Verify], retype the password, and then press [OK]. 7. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, make your selection. 8. Press . Related Information • Setting Lock Overview Related Topics: • How to Enter Text on Your Machine 418 Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Change the Setting Lock Password Change the Setting Lock Password >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 >> MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set Password]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter the current four-digit password. 3. Press [OK]. 4. Enter a new four-digit password. 5. Press [OK]. 6. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password. 7. Press [OK]. 8. Press . MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Admin Settings]. 2. Type the current password, and then press [OK]. 3. Press [Password]. 4. Type the current password again, and then press [OK]. 5. Type a new password you want to use (8 to 32 characters), and then press [OK]. 6. When the LCD displays [Verify], retype the password, and then press [OK]. 7. Press . Related Information • Setting Lock Overview 419 Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Turn Setting Lock On Turn Setting Lock On >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 >> MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock Off⇒On]. 2. Enter the current four-digit password. 3. Press [OK]. To turn Setting Lock off, press on the LCD, enter the current four-digit password, and then press [OK]. MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Admin Settings]. 2. Type the current password, and then press [OK]. 3. Press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock] > [On]. 4. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, make your selection, and then press [OK]. To turn Setting Lock off, repeat steps 1 and 2, and then press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock] > [Off]. 5. Press . Related Information • Setting Lock Overview 420 Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview > Restrict Specific Machine Settings Restrict Specific Machine Settings Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Admin Settings]. 2. Enter the current Administrator password, and then press [OK]. 3. Press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock Details]. 4. When the machine prompts you to select the next step, make your selection, and then press [OK]. To turn Setting Lock off, repeat steps 1 and 2, and then press [Restriction Management] > [Setting Lock] > [Off]. 5. Press . Related Information • Setting Lock Overview 421 Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features Use Global Network Detection Features When you use your machine on a private network, use the Global Network Detection feature to avoid a risk from unexpected attacks from the global network. • Enable Global IP Address Detection • Block Communications from the Global Network 422 Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Enable Global IP Address Detection Enable Global IP Address Detection Use this feature to check your machine's IP address. When your machine is assigned to a global IP address, an alert is displayed on the machine. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Allow Detect] > [On]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press . Related Information • Use Global Network Detection Features 423 Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features > Block Communications from the Global Network Block Communications from the Global Network When you enable this feature, it limits receiving jobs from devices with global IP addresses 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Reject Access] > [On]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press . Related Information • Use Global Network Detection Features 424 Home > Administrator Administrator • Network Features • Security Features • Brother Management Tools 425 Home > Administrator > Network Features Network Features • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management • Print the Network Configuration Report • Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management • Store Print Log to Network 426 Home > Administrator > Security Features Security Features Your machine uses some of the latest network security and encryption protocols. These network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent unauthorised access to the machine. • Network Security • User Authentication 427 Home > Administrator > Security Features > Network Security Network Security • Before Using Network Security Features • Configure Certificates for Device Security • Use SSL/TLS • Use SNMPv3 • Use IPsec • Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network 428 Home > Administrator > Security Features > Network Security > Before Using Network Security Features Before Using Network Security Features Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent unauthorised access to the machine. We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these protocols is not secure. Related Information • Security • Network Security • Disable Unnecessary Protocols 429 Home > Administrator > Security Features > User Authentication User Authentication • Use Active Directory Authentication • Use LDAP Authentication • Use Secure Function Lock 3.0 430 Home > Administrator > Brother Management Tools Brother Management Tools Use one of Brother's management tools to configure your Brother machine's network settings. Go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com to download the tools. Related Information • Administrator 431 Home > Mobile/Web Connect Mobile/Web Connect • Brother Web Connect • AirPrint • Mopria™ Print Service and Mopria™ Scan • Brother Mobile Connect • Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader 432 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Brother Web Connect • Brother Web Connect Overview • Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect • Set Up Brother Web Connect • Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect • Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect • FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail 433 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview Brother Web Connect Overview Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the websites. Your Brother machine can scan images and upload them to these services, and also download and print images that are already uploaded to these services. 1. Printing 2. Scanning 3. Photos, images, documents, and other files 4. Web Service To use Brother Web Connect, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to the Internet, through either a wired or wireless connection. For network setups that use a proxy server, the machine must also be configured to use a proxy server. If you are unsure of your network configuration, check with your network administrator. A proxy server is a computer that serves as an intermediary between computers without a direct Internet connection, and the Internet. Related Information • Brother Web Connect • Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel 434 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Overview > Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured on the machine: • Proxy server address • Port number • User Name • Password 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Connect Settings] > [Proxy Settings] > [Proxy Connection] > [On]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the option that you want to set, and then enter the proxy server information. 3. Press [OK]. 4. Press . Related Information • Brother Web Connect Overview Related Topics: • Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management 435 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect Use Brother Web Connect to access services from your Brother machine: To use Brother Web Connect, you must have an account with the online service you want to use. If you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account. If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account. Google Drive™ An online document storage, editing, sharing, and file synchronisation service. URL: drive.google.com Evernote® An online file storage and management service. URL: www.evernote.com Dropbox An online file storage, sharing, and synchronisation service. URL: www.dropbox.com OneDrive An online file storage, sharing, and managing service. URL: onedrive.live.com Box An online document editing and sharing service. URL: www.box.com OneNote An online document editing and sharing service. URL: www.onenote.com SharePoint Online An online content storage, sharing, and managing service. For more information about any of these services, refer to the respective service's website. The following table describes which file types can be used with each Brother Web Connect feature: Accessible Services Google Drive™ Evernote® Dropbox OneDrive Box OneNote SharePoint Online Download and print images 1 JPEG PDF DOCX XLSX PPTX Upload scanned images JPEG PDF 2 DOCX XLSX 436 Accessible Services Google Drive™ Evernote® Dropbox OneDrive Box OneNote SharePoint Online PPTX TIFF XPS FaxForward to the online services JPEG (available for certain models) TIFF PDF 1 DOC/XLS/PPT formats are also available for downloading and printing images. 2 Includes Searchable PDF, Signed PDF, Secure PDF, PDF/A and High Compression PDF. (For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea) Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not be downloaded. Related Information • Brother Web Connect 437 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect Set Up Brother Web Connect • Brother Web Connect Setup Overview • Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect • Apply for Brother Web Connect Access • Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect 438 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Brother Web Connect Setup Overview Brother Web Connect Setup Overview Configure the Brother Web Connect settings using the following procedure: Step 1: Create an account with the service you want to use. Access the service's website using a computer and create an account. (If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.) 1. User registration 2. Web Service 3. Obtain account Step 2: Apply for Brother Web Connect access. Start Brother Web Connect access using a computer and obtain a temporary ID. 1. Enter account information 2. Brother Web Connect application page 3. Obtain temporary ID Step 3: Register your account information on your machine so you can access the service you want to use. Enter the temporary ID to enable the service on your machine. Specify the account name as you would like it to be displayed on the machine, and enter a PIN if you would like to use one. 1. Enter temporary ID 2. Web Service Your Brother machine can now use the service. 439 Related Information • Set Up Brother Web Connect 440 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect To use Brother Web Connect to access an online service, you must have an account with that online service. If you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account. After creating an account, log on and use the account once with a computer before using the Brother Web Connect feature. Otherwise, you may not be able to access the service using Brother Web Connect. If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account. When you have created an account with the online service you want to use, apply for Brother Web Connect access. Related Information • Set Up Brother Web Connect 441 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Apply for Brother Web Connect Access Apply for Brother Web Connect Access To use Brother Web Connect to access online services, you must first apply for Brother Web Connect access using a computer that has the Brother Software installed. 1. Access the Brother Web Connect application website: Option Description Windows Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click Brother Web Connect. You can also access the website directly: Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar. Mac Type bwc.brother.com into your web browser's address bar. The Brother Web Connect page launches. 2. Select the service you want to use. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions and apply for access. When using SharePoint Online, follow the on-screen instructions to register a document library. When finished, your temporary ID appears. 4. Make a note of your temporary ID as you will need it to register accounts to the machine. The temporary ID is valid for 24 hours. 5. Close the web browser. Now that you have a Brother Web Connect access ID, you must register this ID on your machine, and then use your machine to access the web service you want to use. Related Information • Set Up Brother Web Connect 442 Related Topics: • Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect 443 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Set Up Brother Web Connect > Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect You must enter your Brother Web Connect account information and configure your machine so that it can use Brother Web Connect to access the service you want. • You must apply for Brother Web Connect access to register an account on your machine. • Before you register an account, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine. 1. Swipe to display the [Web] option. 2. Press [Web]. • If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes]. • Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK]. 3. If the information regarding licence agreement appears, make your selection and follow the on-screen instructions. 4. Select the service with which you want to register. 5. Press the service name. 6. If information regarding Brother Web Connect appears, press [OK]. 7. Press [Register/Delete Account]. 8. Press [Register Account]. The machine will prompt you to enter the temporary ID you received when you applied for Brother Web Connect access. 9. Press [OK]. 10. Enter the temporary ID using the LCD. 11. Press [OK]. An error message will appear on the LCD if the information you entered does not match the temporary ID you received when you applied for access, or if the temporary ID has expired. Enter the temporary ID correctly, or apply for access again to receive a new temporary ID. The machine will prompt you to enter the account name that you want displayed on the LCD. 12. Press [OK]. 13. Enter the name using the LCD. 14. Press [OK]. 15. Do one of the following: • To set a PIN for the account, press [Yes]. (A PIN prevents unauthorised access to the account.) Enter a four-digit number, and then press [OK]. • If you do not want to set a PIN, press [No]. 16. When the account information you entered appears, confirm that it is correct. 17. Press [Yes] to register your information as entered. 18. Press [OK]. 19. Press . Registration is complete and your machine can now access the service. 444 Related Information • Set Up Brother Web Connect Related Topics: • How to Enter Text on Your Machine • Apply for Brother Web Connect Access 445 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect Upload your scanned photos and documents directly to a web service without using a computer. Uploaded documents are saved in an album named From_BrotherDevice. For information regarding restrictions, such as the size or number of documents that can be uploaded, refer to the respective service's website. If you are a restricted Web Connect user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain models), you cannot upload the scanned data. 1. Load your document. 2. Swipe to display the [Web] option. 3. Press [Web]. • You can also press [Scan] > [to Web]. • If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes]. • Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK]. 4. Select the service that hosts the account to which you want to upload. 5. Select your account name. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation. Related Information • Brother Web Connect 446 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect Documents that have been uploaded to your account can be downloaded directly to your machine and printed. Documents that other users have uploaded to their own accounts for sharing can also be downloaded to your machine and printed, as long as you have viewing privileges for those documents. If you are a restricted user for Web Connect due, to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain models), you cannot download the data. The Secure Function Lock Page Limit feature applies only to print jobs sent using Brother Web Connect.. For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea: Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not be downloaded. Related Information • Brother Web Connect • Download and Print Using Web Services 447 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect > Download and Print Using Web Services Download and Print Using Web Services 1. Swipe to display the [Web] option. 2. Press [Web]. • If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes]. • Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK]. 3. Select the service that hosts the document you want to download and print. 4. If the PIN entry screen appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK]. Depending on the service, you may have to select the account name from a list. 5. Press [Download to Print]. 6. Select the album you want. Some services do not require documents to be saved in albums. For documents not saved in albums, select [Show Unsorted Photos] or [Show Unsorted Files] to select documents. An album is a collection of images. The actual term may differ depending on the service you use. When using Evernote®, you must select the notebook, and then select the note. 7. Select the thumbnail of the document you want to print. Confirm the document on the LCD and then press [OK]. Select additional documents to print (you can select up to 10 documents). 8. When finished, press [OK]. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation. Related Information • Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect Related Topics: • How to Enter Text on Your Machine 448 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • Use the FaxForward to Cloud feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to your accounts with the available online services. 1 1. Web Service • Use the FaxForward to E-mail feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to an inbox as email attachments. Related Information • Brother Web Connect • Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email • Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location 449 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Turn the FaxForward feature on to automatically forward incoming faxes to either an online service or an inbox as email attachments. • If you are a restricted Apps or Fax Receive user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain models), you cannot upload the incoming faxes. • This feature is available only for monochrome faxes. • If you turn the FaxForward to Cloud feature on, you cannot use the following options: - [Fax Forward] - [Fax Storage] - [PC Fax Receive] - [Forward to Network] 1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option. 2. Press [Apps]. • If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes]. • Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK]. 3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail]. If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK]. 4. Press [On]. 5. Press [Forward to Cloud] or [Forward to E-mail]. • If you selected [Forward to Cloud], choose the online service you want to receive the faxes, and then specify your account name. • If you selected [Forward to E-mail], enter the email address you want to receive the faxes as email attachments. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation. Related Information • FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail 450 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect > FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail > Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Turn the FaxForward feature off when you want to stop incoming faxes from automatically going to either an online service or an inbox as email attachments. If there are received faxes still in your machine's memory, you cannot turn the FaxForward to Cloud feature off. 1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option. 2. Press [Apps]. • If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK]. If you want to display this information again, press [Yes]. • Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK]. 3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail]. If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK]. 4. Press [Off]. 5. Press [OK]. Related Information • FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail 451 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint AirPrint • AirPrint Overview • Before Using AirPrint (macOS) • Print Using AirPrint • Scan Using AirPrint (macOS) • Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS) 452 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > AirPrint Overview AirPrint Overview AirPrint is a printing solution for Apple operating systems that allows you to wirelessly print photos, email, web pages, and documents from your iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Mac computer without the need to install a driver. AirPrint also lets you send faxes directly from your Mac computer without printing them and lets you scan documents to your Mac computer. (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/ MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) AirPrint also lets you scan documents to your Mac computer. For more information, visit Apple’s website. Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Related Information • AirPrint Related Topics: • AirPrint Problems 453 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint (macOS) Before Using AirPrint (macOS) Before printing using macOS, add your machine to the printer list on your Mac computer. 1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu. 2. Click Printers & Scanners. 3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left. The Add Printer screen appears. 4. Do one of the following: • macOS v12 Select your machine, and then select your model's name from the Use pop-up menu. • macOS v11 Select your machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu. 5. Click Add Printer. Related Information • AirPrint 454 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint Print Using AirPrint • Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch • Print Using AirPrint (macOS) 455 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. 1. Make sure your machine is turned on. 2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine. 3. Use Safari to open the page that you want to print. 4. Tap or . 5. Tap Print. 6. Make sure your machine is selected. 7. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, tap Printer. A list of available machines appears. 8. Tap your machine's name in the list. 9. Select the options you want, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your machine). 10. Tap Print. Related Information • Print Using AirPrint 456 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint (macOS) Print Using AirPrint (macOS) The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. Before printing, make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer. 1. Make sure your machine is turned on. 2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine. 3. On your Mac computer, use Safari to open the page that you want to print. 4. Click the File menu, and then select Print. 5. Make sure your machine is selected. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, click the Printer popup menu, and then select your machine. 6. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your machine). 7. Click Print. Related Information • Print Using AirPrint Related Topics: • Before Using AirPrint (macOS) 457 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint (macOS) Scan Using AirPrint (macOS) Before scanning, make sure your machine is in the scanner list on your Mac computer. 1. Load your document. 2. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu. 3. Click Printers & Scanners. 4. Select your machine from the scanner list. 5. Click the Scan tab, and then click the Open Scanner… button. The Scanner screen appears. 6. If you place the document in the ADF, select Use Document Feeder checkbox, and then select the size of your document from the scan size setting pop-up menu. 7. Select the destination folder or destination application from the destination setting pop-up menu. 8. Click Show Details to change the scanning settings if needed. You can crop the image manually by dragging the mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan when scanning from the scanner glass. 9. Click Scan. Related Information • AirPrint Related Topics: • Before Using AirPrint (macOS) 458 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS) Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer. Apple TextEdit is used in the example below. AirPrint supports only monochrome fax documents. 1. Make sure your machine is turned on. 2. On your Mac computer, open the file that you want to send as a fax. 3. Click the File menu, and then select Print. 4. Click the Printer pop-up menu, and then select your model with - Fax in the name. 5. Type the fax recipient information. 6. Click Fax. Related Information • AirPrint Related Topics: • PC-FAX for Mac • Before Using AirPrint (macOS) 459 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mopria™ Print Service and Mopria™ Scan Mopria™ Print Service and Mopria™ Scan Mopria™ Print Service is a print feature and Mopria™ Scan is a scan feature on Android™ mobile devices developed by the Mopria Alliance™. With this service, you can connect to the same network as your machine to print and scan without additional setup. 2 1 3 1. Android™ Mobile Device 2. Wi-Fi® Connection 3. Your Machine You must download the Mopria™ Print Service or Mopria™ Scan from Google Play™ and install it on your Android™ device. Before using these Mopria features, make sure you enable them on your mobile device. Related Information • Mobile/Web Connect 460 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Mobile Connect Brother Mobile Connect Use Brother Mobile Connect to print and scan from your mobile device. • For Android™ devices: Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your Android™ device. Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from Google Play™. • For all iOS or iPadOS supported devices including iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch: Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your iOS or iPadOS device. Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from the App Store. Related Information • Mobile/Web Connect Related Topics: • Brother iPrint&Scan • Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) 461 Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader Register an External Integrated Circuit (IC) Card Reader Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 When you connect an external IC card reader, use Web Based Management to register the card reader. Your machine supports HID class driver supported external IC card readers. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > External Card Reader. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Enter the necessary information. 6. Click Submit. 7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration. Related Information • Mobile/Web Connect 462 Home > Brother iPrint&Scan Brother iPrint&Scan • Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) • Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) 463 Home > Brother iPrint&Scan > Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) Use Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows and Mac to print and scan from your computer. The following screen shows an example of Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows. The actual screen may differ depending on the version of the application. • For Windows Go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com to download the latest application. • For Mac Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store. If prompted, install the driver and software necessary to use your machine. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com. Related Information • Brother iPrint&Scan Related Topics: • Brother Mobile Connect • Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) 464 Home > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your machine. You can correct most problems yourself. IMPORTANT For technical help, you must call Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer. If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com. First, check the following: • The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide. • All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide. • Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray. • The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is set up on both the machine and your computer. • Error and maintenance messages If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information. Related Information • Error and Maintenance Messages • Document Jams • Paper Jams • Printing Problems • Improve the Print Quality • Telephone and Fax Problems • Network Problems • AirPrint Problems • Other Problems • Check the Machine Information • Reset Your Machine 465 Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages Error and Maintenance Messages As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table. Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message. You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit support.brother.com, and click the FAQs & Troubleshooting page. Error Message Cause Action 2-sided Disabled The back cover of the machine is not closed completely. Close the back cover of the machine until it locks in the closed position. The 2-sided tray is not installed completely. Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine. Access Denied The function you want to use is restricted by Secure Function Lock 3.0. Call your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings. BT Call Sign On The BT Call Sign setting is on. Set the BT Call Sign setting to off. You cannot change the Receive Mode from Manual to another mode. (For U.K.) Cannot Detect Your machine cannot detect the Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit drum unit. assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back in Your machine cannot detect the the drum unit. toner cartridge. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine. Cannot Print ## The machine has a mechanical problem. • The document is too long for 2‑sided scanning. to turn the machine off, wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again. • Cannot Scan Press and hold If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer. Press . For 2-sided scanning, use A4 size paper. Other paper must be within the following size: Length: 147.3 to 355.6 mm Width: 105 to 215.9 mm Cannot Scan ## The machine has a mechanical problem. • Press and hold to turn the machine off, and then turn it on again. • If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer. Comm.Error Poor telephone line quality caused a communication error. Send the fax again or connect the machine to another telephone line. If the problem continues, contact your telephone company and ask them to check the telephone line. Cooling Down The temperature of the inside of the machine is too hot. The machine pauses its current print job and goes into Cooling Down mode. Wait until the machine has finished cooling down. Make sure all vents on the machine are clear of obstructions. When the machine has cooled down, it will resume printing. If the fan is not spinning, disconnect the machine from the power for several minutes, then reconnect it. 466 Error Message Cause Action Cover is Open The front cover is not completely closed. Open and then firmly close the front cover of the machine. Cover is Open. The fuser cover is not completely closed or paper was jammed in the back of the machine when you turned on the power. Close the fuser cover located inside the back cover of the machine. The ADF cover is not completely closed. Close the ADF cover. The other person or other person's fax machine stopped the call. Try to send or receive again. Cover is Open. Disconnected Make sure paper is not jammed inside the back of the machine, and then close the fuser cover. If the error message remains, press . If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the Compatibility to Basic (for VoIP). Document Jam The document was not inserted Remove the jammed paper from the ADF unit. or fed correctly, or the Clear any debris or scraps of paper from the ADF document scanned from the unit paper path. ADF was too long. Press . Drum ! The corona wire on the drum unit must be cleaned. Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. See Related Information: Clean the Corona Wire. If the problem continues, replace the drum unit with a new one. Drum Error The drum unit or the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly is not installed correctly. Remove the drum unit, remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit, and put the toner cartridge back into the drum unit. Reinstall the drum unit in the machine. The drum unit is not installed correctly. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly. If the problem continues, replace the drum unit with a new one. See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit. Jam 2-sided The paper is jammed in the 2sided tray or inside the back cover. Jam Inside The paper is jammed inside the Open the front cover, remove the toner cartridge machine. and drum unit assembly, and pull out all jammed paper. Close the front cover. Jam MP Tray The paper is jammed in the MP tray. Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back cover to pull out all jammed paper. Remove all jammed paper from in and around the MP tray. Press Retry. 467 Error Message Cause Action Jam Rear The paper is jammed in the back of the machine. Open the fuser cover and remove all jammed paper. Close the fuser cover. If the error message remains, press Retry. Jam Tray 1 The paper is jammed in the indicated paper tray. Pull out the paper tray and remove all jammed paper as shown in the animation on the LCD. Jam Tray 2 Jam Tray 3 Limit Exceeded The print limit set in Secure Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock 3.0 was reached. Function Lock settings. Media Type Mismatch The media type specified in the printer driver differs from the paper type specified in the machine's menu. Load the correct type of paper in the tray indicated on the LCD, and then select the correct media type in the Paper Type setting on the machine. Press Retry. No Drum The drum unit is not installed correctly. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly. See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit. No HUB Support A USB hub device is connected Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB to the USB accessory port. accessory port. No Paper The machine is out of paper, or paper is not loaded correctly in the paper trays. No Paper Fed T1 No Paper Fed T2 • Refill paper in the paper trays. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size. • If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size. • Do not overfill the paper tray. The machine cannot feed paper Pull out the paper tray indicated on the LCD and from the indicated paper tray. remove all jammed paper. No Paper Fed T3 No Paper MP Tray No Paper No Paper T1 No Paper T2 No Paper T3 The MP tray is out of paper, or paper is not loaded correctly in the MP tray. Do one of the following: • Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size. • If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size. The machine cannot feed paper Do one of the following: from the indicated paper tray. • Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on the LCD. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size. No Paper Tray 1 • If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size. • Do not overfill the paper tray. No Paper Tray 2 No Paper Tray 3 No Response An unsupported USB device • has been connected to the USB accessory port. • Unplug the device from the USB accessory port. Press and hold to turn the machine off, and then turn it on again. No Response/Busy The number you dialled does not answer or is busy. Verify the number and try again. 468 Error Message Cause Action No Toner The toner cartridge is not installed or is not installed correctly. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back in the drum unit. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine. If the problem continues, replace the toner cartridge with a new one. See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge. No Tray T1 No Tray T2 The paper tray is not installed or not installed correctly. Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD. The machine's fax memory is full. If you are using the Fax Preview function, delete unwanted received fax data. No Tray T3 Out of Fax Memory If you are using the Memory Receive function and are not using the Fax Preview function, print received fax data. To print fax data, press Settings > All Settings > Fax > Print Document. Out of Memory The machine's memory is full. If a fax-sending or copy operation is in process Do one of the following: • Press Send Now to send the pages scanned so far. • Press Partial Print to copy the pages scanned so far. • Press Quit or and wait until the other operations that are in progress finish, and then try again. If a scan operation is in progress, do one of the following: • Split the document into multiple parts. • Reduce the resolution. • Reduce the file size. • Select the high compression PDF file type. • Clear faxes from the memory. If a print operation is in process Press and reduce the print resolution. Output Tray Full The output paper tray is full. Remove the printed paper from the Face-down output tray. Paper Low The paper tray is nearly empty. Refill the paper in the paper tray indicated on the LCD. Paper Low T1 Paper Low T2 Paper Low T3 Print Data Full The machine’s memory is full. Press and delete the previously stored secure print data. Received Fax ## An unprinted received fax is waiting to print on the correct size paper. To print the received fax, load the correct size of paper in the tray indicated on the LCD. Paper sizes available for fax printing are A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal and India Legal. 469 Error Message Cause Replace Toner The toner cartridge is at the end Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. of its life. See Related Information: Replace the Toner After stopping printing, faxes Cartridge. are stored in memory while memory is available. Self-Diagnostic The fuser unit does not work correctly. The fuser unit is too hot. Action Press and hold to turn the machine off, wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on. Size Error The paper tray you selected Change the printer driver setting or machine's tray does not support the paper size setting so that the paper size selected in the specified in the printer driver. printer driver matches the paper size loaded in the tray you selected. Size Error 2-sided The paper size specified in the machine's paper size setting is not suitable for automatic 2sided printing. Press (if required). Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the tray for that paper size. The paper in the tray is not the correct size and is not suitable for automatic 2-sided printing. Choose a paper size suitable for 2-sided printing. Size Mismatch The paper in the tray is not the correct size. Load the correct size of paper in the tray indicated on the LCD and set the size of paper for the tray. Storage device not recognized Your machine cannot read from Press and hold to turn the machine off, and or write to the USB flash then turn it on again. memory drive. If the problem continues, reset the location where you save jobs. Storage Full The USB flash memory drive Delete the previously stored print data from the you are using does not have USB flash memory drive. enough free space to store print data. Supplies The drum unit is near the end of Order a new drum unit before the LCD displays its life. Replace Drum. Drum End Soon Supplies The paper size suitable for automatic 2-sided printing is A4. It is time to replace the drum unit. Replace the drum unit with a new one. If the LCD displays this message, you can still print. The toner cartridge is near the end of its life. Order a new toner cartridge now so you have it ready when the LCD displays Replace Toner. Too Many Trays The number of installed Optional Trays exceeds the maximum number. Reduce the number of Optional Trays. Touchscreen Initialisation Failed The touchscreen was pressed when turning the machine on. Make sure nothing is touching the touchscreen. Debris may be stuck between the lower part of the touchscreen and its frame. Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back and forth to push out any debris. Tray removed The standard paper tray is not installed or not installed correctly. Reinstall the standard paper tray. Unusable Device An unsupported USB device Unplug the device from the USB accessory port. has been connected to the USB accessory port. Replace Drum Supplies Toner Low See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit. 470 Error Message Cause Action Unusable Device • Remove the Device. Turn the power off and back on again. A defective USB device or a high power consumption USB device has been connected to the USB accessory port. Unplug the device from the USB accessory port. • Press and hold USB flash drive not detected Your machine cannot detect a USB flash memory drive. Insert a USB flash memory drive into the USB accessory port. Wrong Drum The installed drum unit is not correct for your machine. Remove the drum unit and install a drum unit with the correct supply product code. to turn the machine off, and then turn it on again. See Related Information: Replace the Drum Unit. Wrong Paper Size MP Wrong Paper Size T1 Wrong Paper Size T2 Wrong Paper Size T3 Wrong Toner Cartridge The specified tray ran out of paper during copying and the machine could not feed the same size paper from the next priority tray. Refill the paper in the paper tray. The installed toner cartridge is not correct for your machine. Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit, and install a toner cartridge with the correct supply product code. See Related Information: Replace the Toner Cartridge. Related Information • Troubleshooting • Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes Related Topics: • Load and Print Using the Paper Tray • Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) • Replace Supplies • Replace the Toner Cartridge • Replace the Drum Unit • Clean the Corona Wire • Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory • Secure Print Using a USB Flash Drive 471 Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 If the LCD displays: • [Cannot Print] ## • [Cannot Scan] ## We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your computer. You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you must transfer. If there is an error message on the LCD after you transfer the faxes, disconnect your Brother machine from the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it. Related Information • Error and Maintenance Messages • Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine • Transfer Faxes to Your Computer • Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine 472 Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You must set up your Station ID before transferring faxes to another fax machine. [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Fax Transfer]. 1. Press If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Do one of the following: • If the LCD displays [No Data], there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press [Close]. Press . • Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded. 3. Press [Fax Start]. Related Information • Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes Related Topics: • Set Your Station ID 473 Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Your Computer Transfer Faxes to Your Computer Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Make sure you have installed the software and drivers on your computer. (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already 2. Launch selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive. The PC-FAX Receive window appears. 3. Make sure you have set [PC Fax Receive] on the machine. If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the LCD displays [Send Fax to PC?]. 4. Do one of the following: • To transfer all faxes to your computer, press [Yes]. • To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press [No]. 5. Press . Related Information • Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes 474 Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes > Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You must set up your Station ID before transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Report Transfer]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter the fax number to which the Fax Journal report will be forwarded. 3. Press [Fax Start]. Related Information • Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes Related Topics: • Set Your Station ID 475 Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams Document Jams • Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit • Document is Jammed under the Document Cover • Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF 476 Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit 1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed. 2. Open the ADF cover. 3. Pull the jammed document out to the left. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or scraps to prevent future jams. 4. Close the ADF cover. 5. Press . Related Information • Document Jams 477 Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed under the Document Cover Document is Jammed under the Document Cover 1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed. 2. Lift the document cover. 3. Pull the jammed document out to the right. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or scraps to prevent future jams. 4. Close the document cover. 5. Press . Related Information • Document Jams 478 Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF 1. Lift the document cover. 2. Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through. (DCP-L5510DW) (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) 3. Close the document cover. 4. Press . Related Information • Document Jams 479 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams Paper Jams Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray, fan and straighten the stack when you are adding new paper. This helps prevent paper jams. • Clear Paper Jams • Paper is Jammed in the MP tray • Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray • Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine • Paper is Jammed inside the Machine • Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray 480 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Clear Paper Jams Clear Paper Jams If paper is jammed or multiple sheets of paper are fed together frequently, do the following: • Clean the paper pick-up rollers and the separator pad of paper trays. See Related Information: Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers. • Load paper correctly in the tray. See Related Information: Load Paper. • Set the correct paper size and paper type on your machine. See Related Information: Paper Settings. • Set the correct paper size and paper type on your computer. See Related Information: Print a Document (Windows). See Related Information: Print Using AirPrint. • Use the recommended paper. See Related Information: Using Special Paper. See Related Information: Recommended Print Media. Related Information • Paper Jams Related Topics: • Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers • Load Paper • Paper Settings • Print a Document (Windows) • Print Using AirPrint • Using Special Paper • Recommended Print Media 481 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the MP tray Paper is Jammed in the MP tray If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow these steps: 1. Remove the paper from the MP tray. 2. Slowly remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray. 3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray. 4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1) on both sides of the tray. 1 5. Follow the instructions on the machine's LCD. Related Information • Paper Jams 482 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these steps: 1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine. 2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper. Pulling the jammed paper downwards using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily. 3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Load paper in the paper tray. 483 4. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b). 5. Put the paper tray firmly back into the machine. Related Information • Paper Jams 484 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back of the machine (Jam Rear), do the following: 1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the machine. 2. Open the back cover. 3. Pull the green levers at the left and right sides towards you to release the fuser cover. WARNING HOT SURFACE The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them. 485 4. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the machine. 5. Close the fuser cover. 6. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position. Related Information • Paper Jams 486 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed inside the Machine Paper is Jammed inside the Machine If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these steps: 1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the machine. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly. WARNING HOT SURFACE The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them. 487 4. Pull out the jammed paper slowly. 5. Install the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. 6. Close the front cover. Related Information • Paper Jams 488 Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the 2-sided paper tray, follow these steps: 1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the machine. 2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine. 3. At the back of the machine, pull the 2‑sided tray completely out of the machine. 4. Pull the jammed paper out of the machine or out of the 2‑sided tray. 489 5. Remove paper that may have jammed under the machine due to static electricity. 6. If paper is not caught inside the 2-sided tray, open the back cover. 7. Pull the green levers at the left and right sides towards you to release the fuser cover. WARNING HOT SURFACE The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them. 490 8. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine. 9. Close the fuser cover. 10. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position. 11. Push the 2-sided tray firmly back into the back of the machine. 12. Push the paper tray firmly back into the front of the machine. Related Information • Paper Jams 491 Home > Troubleshooting > Printing Problems Printing Problems If, after reading the information in this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting tips at support.brother.com/faqs. Difficulties Suggestions No printout Check the machine is not in Power Off mode. If the machine is in Power Off mode, press , and then send the print data again. Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and selected. Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's control panel displays an error. Check that the machine is online: • Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. Right-click your model's icon, and click See what's printing. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not selected. • Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices and printers. Right-click your model's name. Click See what's printing. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected. • Windows Server 2012 R2 Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. Right-click your model's name. Click See what’s printing. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not selected. • Windows Server 2012 Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. Right-click your model's name. Click See what's printing. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected. The machine is not printing or has stopped printing. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print data again. See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job. The headers or footers appear when the document displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is printed. There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your document to allow for this. 492 Difficulties Suggestions The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbled text. Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print data again. See Related Information:Cancel a Print Job. Check the settings in your application to make sure they are set up to work with your machine. Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your application's Print window. The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly, then some pages have missing text. Check the settings in your application to make sure they are set up to work with your machine. Your machine is not receiving all of the data sent from the computer. Make sure you connected the interface cable correctly. The machine does not print on both sides of the paper even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the machine supports automatic 2-sided printing. Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You must select A4 paper. Supported paper weight is 60 to 105g/m² Print speed is too slow. Reduce the resolution in the printer driver. If you have enabled Quiet Mode, disable it in the printer driver or the machine's menu. When printing continuously, the printing speed may be automatically reduced to lower the temperature inside the machine. The machine does not feed paper. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the stack over and place it back in the paper tray. Fan the stack of paper well and place it back to the paper tray. Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again. (For models with MP Tray) Make sure MP Tray is not selected for Paper Source in the printer driver. Clean the paper pick-up rollers. The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray. (For models with MP Tray) Fan the paper well and place it back in the MP tray. The machine does not feed envelopes. Load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be set to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu of your application. Print position is misaligned with the letterhead or preprinted objects. Adjust the print position using the Print Position setting for each paper tray. Make sure MP Tray is selected as the Paper Source in the printer driver. Related Information • Troubleshooting Related Topics: • Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) • Cancel a Print Job • Load and Print Using the Paper Tray • Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers 493 • Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) 494 Home > Troubleshooting > Improve the Print Quality Improve the Print Quality If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality and follow the recommendations in the table. 1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that meets our specifications. 2. Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly. Examples of poor print quality ABCDEFGH CDEF abcdefghijk cdefg ABCD abcde 01234 Recommendation • If the machine displays the Replace Toner status, install a new toner cartridge. • Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as humidity, high temperatures, and so on, may cause this print fault. • If the whole page is too light, Toner Save mode may be turned on. Turn Toner Save mode off in the machine's menu settings or the printer driver. • Clean the drum unit. • Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. • Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high temperatures and high humidity can increase the amount of background shading. • Clean the drum unit. • Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as low humidity and low temperatures may cause this print quality problem. • Select the appropriate media type in the printer driver. • Clean the drum unit. • Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • The fuser unit may be contaminated. Faint ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk ABCD abcde 01234 Grey background Ghosting images Contact Brother customer service. ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk ABCD abcde 01234 • Make sure the media type setting in the driver matches the type of paper you are using. • Clean the drum unit. • The toner cartridge may be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. Toner specks • The fuser unit may be contaminated. Contact Brother customer service. 495 Examples of poor print quality Hollow print Recommendation • Select Thick Paper mode in the printer driver or use thinner paper than you are currently using. • Select the appropriate media type from the paper type options on your machine. • Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity can cause hollow print. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. All black ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk ABCD abcde 01234 White lines across the page • Select the appropriate media type in the printer driver. • Select the appropriate media type from the paper type options on your machine. • The problem may disappear by itself. Print several blank pages to clear this problem, especially if the machine has not been used for a long time. • Clean the drum unit. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk • Clean the drum unit. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. ABCD abcde 01234 Lines across the page • Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as high humidity and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. • Clean the drum unit. • If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • Make 10-15 copies of a blank, white sheet of paper. If the problem is not solved after printing the blank pages, the drum unit may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum. Clean the drum unit. White lines, bands or ribbing across the page See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit. • White spots on black text and graphics at 94 mm intervals The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. 496 Examples of poor print quality Recommendation Black spots at 94 mm intervals • ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk ABCD abcde 01234 Black toner marks across the page If you use label sheets for laser printers, the glue from the sheets may sometimes stick to the drum surface. Clean the drum unit. See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit. • If you used paper that has clips or staples, the drum unit may be damaged. • If the unpacked drum unit is in direct sunlight (or room light for long periods of time), the unit may be damaged. • Clean the drum unit. • The toner cartridge may be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by sliding the green tab. Make sure the green tab of the corona wire is in the Home position (1). ABCD abcde 01234 Black lines down the page Printed pages have toner stains down the page • Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft cloth. • The toner cartridge may be damaged. Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • The drum unit may be damaged. Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • The fuser unit may be contaminated. Contact Brother customer service. • Make sure there is no foreign material, such as a torn piece of paper, sticky notes or dust, inside the machine and around the toner cartridge and drum unit. • The toner cartridge may be damaged. ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk ABCD abcde 01234 Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge. • The drum unit may be damaged. 497 Examples of poor print quality Recommendation White lines down the page Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit. • Set the document correctly in the ADF or on the scanner glass if the skew only occurs when making copies. ABCD abcde 01234 • Make sure the paper or other print media is loaded correctly in the paper tray and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. • Set the paper guides correctly. Image skewed • The paper tray may be too full. • Check the paper type and quality. • Check for loose objects such as torn paper inside the machine. • If the problem only occurs during automatic 2-sided printing, check for torn paper in the 2-sided tray. Verify the 2-sided tray is inserted completely and the back cover is closed completely. • Check the paper type and quality. High temperatures and high humidity will cause paper to curl. • If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper stack, and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper tray. • Open the back cover (face up output tray) to let the printed paper exit onto the face up output tray. • Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do not use our recommended print media. • Make sure paper is loaded correctly. • Check the paper type and quality. • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray or rotate the paper 180° in the input tray. • Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver matches the type of paper you are using. • Select Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. FGH ABCDE ijk h fg e d c ab Curled or wavy image B DEFGH abc efghijk A CD bcde 1 34 Wrinkles or creases ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz. If this selection does not provide enough improvement, change the printer driver setting in Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an envelope, select Env. Thick in the media type setting. Poor fixing • Make sure envelopes are printed with the back cover (face up output tray) opened. • (For models with MP Tray) Make sure envelopes are fed only from the MP tray. Envelope creases 498 Related Information • Troubleshooting Related Topics: • Test Print • Clean the Drum Unit • Reduce Toner Consumption • Replace the Toner Cartridge • Replace the Drum Unit • Clean the Scanner 499 Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems Telephone and Fax Problems Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Telephone Line or Connections Difficulties Suggestions Dialling does not work. (No dial tone) Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions. (Available only for some countries.) Change the Tone/Pulse setting. If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the handset of the external telephone and dialling the number using the external telephone. Wait to hear the fax receiving tones before sending a fax. If there is no dial tone, connect a known working telephone and telephone line cord to the socket. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is still no dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or wall socket. The machine does not answer when called. Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line. Handling Incoming Calls Difficulties Suggestions Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an extension or external telephone, press your Remote Activation Code (the factory setting is *51). If you answered on the external telephone, press the Start button to receive the fax. When your machine answers, hang up. Custom features on a single line. If you have Call Waiting, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving faxes. For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, we recommend using a separate telephone line with no custom features. Receiving Faxes Difficulties Suggestions Cannot receive Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone a fax. wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions. If you are using a VoIP system, try changing the VoIP setting to Basic (for VoIP). This will lower modem speed and turn off Error Correction Mode (ECM). 500 Difficulties Suggestions Cannot receive Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices a fax. and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as the Brother machine. • If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode. • If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will receive incoming faxes automatically and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine. • If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will receive faxes automatically and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls. • If you do not want your Brother machine to answer any incoming faxes automatically, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes. Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting: • If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay to the minimum value (excluding “0”). See Related Information: Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay). • If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your answering machine to two. • If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting. Have someone send you a test fax: • If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating correctly. Remember to reset your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer. • If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line. If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly. 1. Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings. 2. Record the outgoing message on your answering machine. • Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message. • Limit your speaking to 20 seconds. • End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.” 3. Set your answering machine to answer calls. 4. Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. See Related Information: Choose the Correct Receive Mode. Make sure your Brother machine’s Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you answered the call on an external or extension telephone. If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for VoIP). Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings. Sending Faxes Difficulties Suggestions Cannot send a fax. Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions. Make sure you pressed Fax and the machine is in Fax mode. Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error. 501 Difficulties Suggestions Cannot send a fax. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings. Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper. Poor quality of sent faxes. Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is poor, clean the scanner. Transmission Verification Report says RESULT:ERROR. There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:ERROR on the Transmission Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you can turn Fax Storage off, print fax messages in memory or cancel a delayed fax. If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line. If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for VoIP). Sent faxes are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly. When using the ADF, the document should be face up. When using the scanner glass, the document should be face down. Vertical black lines when sending a fax. Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the glass strip. Clean the glass strip. Printing received faxes Difficulties Suggestions • Condensed print • Horizontal streaks • Top and bottom sentences are cut off This is usually caused by a poor telephone connection. Do a test copy; if your copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again. • Missing lines Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wire may be dirty.Clean the corona wire in the drum unit. The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine. Received faxes appear as split or blank pages. Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages. If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using. Turn Auto Reduction on. Related Information • Troubleshooting • Set Dial Tone Detection • Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems Related Topics: • Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay) • Choose the Correct Receive Mode 502 Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Dial Tone Detection Set Dial Tone Detection Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Setting the Dial Tone to [Detection] shortens the Dial Tone detect pause. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Tone]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Detection] or [No Detection]. 3. Press . Related Information • Telephone and Fax Problems 503 Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Problems sending and receiving faxes due to possible interference on the telephone line may be solved by reducing the modem speed to minimise errors in fax transmission. If you are using a Voice over IP (VoIP) service, we recommend changing the compatibility to Basic (for VoIP). • VoIP is a type of phone system that uses an Internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line. • Telephone providers frequently bundle VoIP together with Internet and cable services. >> MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the option you want. • Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps. • Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps. • Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use this option only when needed. 3. Press . MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the option you want. • Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps. • Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps. • Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use this option only when needed. 3. Press . Related Information • Telephone and Fax Problems 504 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems Network Problems • Error Messages • Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) • Check Your Machine's Network Settings • I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration • My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network • I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly 505 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Error Messages Error Messages The most common error messages are shown in the table. Error Messages Cause Action The maximum number of devices are already connected using Wi-Fi Direct. Four mobile devices are already connected to the Wi-Fi Direct network when the Brother machine is the Group Owner. After the current connection between your Brother machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm the connection status by printing the Network Configuration Report. Authentication Error, contact your administrator. Your authentication setting for the Store Print Log to Network feature is not correct. • Make sure the Username and Password in Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is part of a domain, enter the username in one of the following styles: user@domain or domain\user. • Make sure the time of the log file server matches the time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings. • Make sure the SNTP time server settings are configured correctly so the time matches the time used for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is no SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the control panel so the machine matches the time being used by the server providing the authentication. Check User ID and Password. The Kerberos Authentication error. Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a password for the Kerberos server. For more information on the Kerberos server settings, contact your network administrator. The date, time and time zone settings of the Brother machine are not correct. Confirm your machine's date, time, and time zone settings. The DNS server configuration is not correct. Contact your network administrator for the information on the DNS server settings. The Brother machine cannot connect to the Kerberos server. Contact your network administrator for the information on the Kerberos server settings. Connection Error Other devices are trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network at the same time. Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure the WiFi Direct settings again. Connection Failed The Brother machine and your • mobile device cannot communicate during the Wi-Fi • Direct network configuration. File Access Error, The Brother machine cannot contact your access the destination folder administrator. for the Store Print Log to Network feature. In Web Based Management, you have selected the Cancel Print option in the Error Detection Setting section of the Store Print Log to Network feature. Move the mobile device closer to your Brother machine. Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to an obstruction-free area. • If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure you have entered the correct PIN. • Make sure the destination folder name is correct. • Make sure the destination folder is write-enabled. • Make sure the print log file is not locked. If it is, contact your network administrator. Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears from the LCD. 506 Error Messages Cause Action No Device When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct network, the Brother machine cannot find your mobile device. • Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the Wi-Fi Direct mode. • Move the mobile device closer to your Brother machine. • Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to an obstruction-free area. • If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct network, make sure you have entered the correct password. • If your mobile device has a configuration page for obtaining an IP address, make sure your mobile device's IP address has been configured via DHCP. Server Timeout, contact your administrator. The Brother machine cannot connect to the server for the Store Print Log to Network feature. • Make sure your server address is correct. • Make sure your server is connected to the network. • Make sure the machine is connected to the network. Server Timeout The Brother machine cannot connect to the LDAP server. • Make sure your server address is correct. • Make sure your server is connected to the network. • Make sure the machine is connected to the network. The Brother machine cannot • connect to the Active Directory • server. • Wrong Date & Time, The Brother machine does not • contact your obtain the time from the SNTP administrator. time server or you have not • configured the Date&Time for the machine. Internal Error The Brother machine's LDAP protocol is disabled. Make sure your server address is correct. Make sure your server is connected to the network. Make sure the machine is connected to the network. Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server are configured correctly in Web Based Management. Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are correct in Web Based Management. Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the necessary protocol setting in Web Based Management. The Brother machine's CIFS protocol is disabled. Related Information • Network Problems Related Topics: • Print the Network Configuration Report 507 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct IP address and Subnet Mask. Make sure your machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer. 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Network Connection Repair Tool. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page. The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings > Enable Connection Repair Tool. This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address. If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information. Related Information • Network Problems Related Topics: • Print the Network Configuration Report • My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network • I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly 508 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Check Your Machine's Network Settings Check Your Machine's Network Settings • Print the Network Configuration Report 509 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration Related Models: DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then, try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to resolve the problem, follow the instructions below: Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report. Cause Action Your security settings (SSID/ Confirm the security settings using Wireless Setup Helper Network Key) are not (Windows). For more information and to download the utility, go to correct. your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com. Interface Wireless Select and confirm that you are using the correct security settings. - See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router for information on how to find the security settings. - The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless LAN access point/router may be used as the default security settings. - Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your Internet provider, or network administrator. Your Brother machine's MAC Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the address is not allowed. filter. You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's control panel. Wireless Your wireless LAN access point/router is in Stealth mode (not broadcasting the SSID). Wireless • Enter the correct SSID or Network Key manually. • Check the SSID or the Network Key in the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router and reconfigure the wireless network setup. Wireless Your machine is trying to Change the channel on your wireless LAN access point/router to a connect to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi channel supported by your machine. network. The current 1. Confirm the channels supported by your machine. Go to channel set on your wireless support.brother.com/g/d/a5m6/, select your model, and then click LAN access point/router is Download for more information. not supported. 2. Check your wireless LAN access point/router‘s channel setting. Make sure it is set to one of the channels supported by your machine, and not set to "Auto" or "Automatic". For more information about changing the channel setting, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router. 3. Try to connect your machine to your Wi-Fi network again. Your security settings (SSID/ Confirm the SSID and password. password) are not correct. When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID and password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your mobile device supports the manual configuration, the SSID and password will be displayed on your mobile device’s screen. Wi-Fi Direct You are using Android™ 4.0. If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS (recommended) and set the Brother machine as a Group Owner. Wi-Fi Direct 510 Cause Action Interface Your Brother machine is placed too far from your mobile device. Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 metre) of the mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings. Wi-Fi Direct There are some obstructions Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area. (walls or furniture, for example) between your machine and the mobile device. Wi-Fi Direct There is a wireless computer, Bluetooth®supported device, microwave oven, or digital cordless phone near the Brother machine or your mobile device. Move other devices away from the Brother machine or your mobile device. Wi-Fi Direct You have checked and tried all of the above, but your Brother machine still cannot complete the Wi-Fi Direct configuration. • Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then, try to configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. Wi-Fi Direct • If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how many devices are allowed on the current Wi-Fi Direct network, and then check how many devices are connected. For Windows If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool. Related Information • Network Problems Related Topics: • Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast • Use Wi-Fi Direct® 511 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Cause Action Interface Your security software blocks your machine's access to the network. (The network scanning feature does not work. ) • Wired/Wireless Windows Configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow network scanning. To add port 54925 for network scanning, type the information below: - In Name: Type any description, for example Brother NetScan. - In Port number: Type 54925. - In Protocol: UDP is selected. See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer. • Mac (Brother iPrint&Scan) In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then doubleclick the Brother iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan window appears. Click the Select your Machine button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to reselect your network machine. Your security software blocks your machine's access to the network. (The network PC-Fax Receive feature does not work.) Set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, type the information below: • Wired/Wireless In Name: Type any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx. • In Port number: Type 54926. (Windows) • In Protocol: UDP is selected. See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/ Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer. Your security software blocks your machine's access to the network. Some security software might block access without showing a security Wired/Wireless alert dialog box even after successful installation. To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask the software manufacturer. Your Brother machine was • not assigned an available IP address. Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask. Wired/Wireless Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the same network. For more information about how to verify the IP address and the Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator. • Windows Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network Connection Repair Tool. 512 Cause Action Interface A failed print job is still in your computer's print queue. • If a failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it. Wired/Wireless • Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and cancel all documents: - Windows 11 Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. - Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022 Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices and printers. - Windows Server 2012 R2 Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. - Windows Server 2012 Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers > Printers. - Mac Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners. Your machine is not connected to the wireless network. Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report. Wireless See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report. If you have checked and tried all of the above, but you are still having problems, uninstall the drivers (Windows) and the software and reinstall the latest ones. Related Information • Network Problems Related Topics: • Print the WLAN Report • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes • Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) • I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly 513 Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Check Action Interface Wired/Wireless Check that your Brother Check the following: machine, access point/ • The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is router, or network hub is turned on. turned on. • The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link LED is blinking. • All protective packaging has been removed from the machine. • The toner cartridge and drum unit assembly is installed correctly. • The machine's cover is fully closed. • Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray. • (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the Brother machine and to the router or hub. Check the Link Status on the Network Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page. Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK. Wired/Wireless Check that you can "ping" the Brother machine from your computer. Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or the node name in the Windows command prompt or Mac Terminal application: Wired/Wireless ping <ipaddress> or <nodename>. • Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and connected to the same network as your computer. • Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same network as your computer. Windows: Ask your administrator about the IP address and the subnet mask, and then use the Network Connection Repair Tool. Mac: Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly. Check that your Brother Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report. machine is connected to See Related Information: Print the WLAN Report. the wireless network. Wireless If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with your wireless access point/router to find the SSID (Network Name) and the Network Key (Password) information and set them correctly. Related Information • Network Problems Related Topics: • Print the Network Configuration Report • Print the WLAN Report • Wireless LAN Report Error Codes 514 • Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) • My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network 515 Home > Troubleshooting > AirPrint Problems AirPrint Problems NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Difficulties Suggestions My machine is not displayed in the printer list. Make sure your machine is turned on. Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac are connected to the same network. Move your mobile device closer to the wireless access point/router, or to your machine. I cannot print. Make sure your machine is turned on. Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac are connected to the same network. I am trying to print a multi-page document from an iOS device, but ONLY the first page is printing. Make sure you are running the latest OS version. Related Information • Troubleshooting Related Topics: • AirPrint Overview 516 Home > Troubleshooting > Other Problems Other Problems Difficulties Suggestions The machine will not turn on. Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord and press to turn the machine on. If the problem is not solved and you are using a power breaker, disconnect it to make sure it is not the problem. Plug the machine's power cord directly into a different known working wall electrical socket. If there is still no power, try a different power cable. The machine cannot print EPS data that includes binary with the BR-Script3 printer driver. (Windows) To print EPS data, do the following: 1. Windows 11: Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers. For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022: Click > Windows System > Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices and printers. For Windows Server 2012: Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. For Windows Server 2012 R2: Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers. 2. Right-click your model's icon with BR-Script3 in the name, select Printer properties. If your model with BR-Script3 in the name does not appear, right-click your model's icon, select Printer properties, and then select your model with BR-Script3 in the name. 3. From the Device Settings tab, choose TBCP (Tagged Binary Communication Protocol) in Output Protocol. The Brother software cannot be installed. (Windows) If the Security Software warning appears on the computer screen during the installation, change the Security Software settings to permit the Brother product setup program or other program to run. (Mac) If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then install the Brother software. Copying difficulties 517 Difficulties Suggestions Cannot make a copy. Make sure you pressed Copy and the machine is in Copy mode. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings. Vertical black line appears in copies. Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the glass strip, or the corona wire is dirty. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the white bar and white plastic above them. Copies are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly. Scanning difficulties Difficulties Suggestions TWAIN or WIA errors appear when starting to scan. (Windows) Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is selected as the primary source in your scanning application. For example, in Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE, click Desktop > Scan Settings > Select to select the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver. OCR does not work. Try increasing the scanning resolution. Cannot scan. Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings. Software difficulties Difficulties Suggestions Cannot install software or print. (Windows) Run the install program again. This program will repair and reinstall the software. Related Information • Troubleshooting 518 Home > Troubleshooting > Check the Machine Information Check the Machine Information Follow these instructions to check your machine's serial number and firmware version. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press one of the following options: Option Description Serial No. Check your machine's serial number. Firmware Version Check your machine's firmware version. Firmware Update Update your machine to the latest firmware. Firmware Auto Check View firmware information on the Main Home screen. Page Counter Check the total number of pages the machine has printed. Parts Life Check the percentage of the supplies' life that remains available. 3. Press . Related Information • Troubleshooting 519 Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Machine Reset Your Machine 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the reset function you want to use. • The network settings, the security settings and address book data will not be reset by the [Machine Reset]. • If you discard or dispose the machine, we recommend performing a [Factory Reset] to erase the personal data in the machine. 3. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.] appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm. You can also reset the network settings by pressing [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset]. The machine will restart. Related Information • Troubleshooting • Reset Functions Overview Related Topics: • Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings 520 Home > Troubleshooting > Reset Your Machine > Reset Functions Overview Reset Functions Overview The following reset functions are available: Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network Settings Reset function, All Settings Reset function or Factory Reset function. 1. Machine Reset Reset all the machine’s settings that you have changed, such as Date and Time and Ring Delay. The Address Book, fax reports, and Call history will remain. (For models with facsimile function) 2. Network Settings Reset (For Network Models) Reset the print server back to its default factory settings (includes Password and IP Address information). 3. Address Book and Fax Settings Reset This function resets the following settings: The following settings, with the exception of the Address Book and the Setting Lock password, apply to models with facsimile function. • Address Book (Addresses and Groups) • Programmed fax jobs in the memory (Delayed Fax) • Station ID (name and number) • Coverpage Message • Fax receive settings (Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows only)) • Report (Transmission Verification Report / Tel Index List / Fax Journal) • Setting Lock password (available models only) 4. All Settings Reset Reset all the machine's settings back to the settings that were set at the factory. All Settings Reset takes less time than Factory Reset. 5. Factory Reset Use the Settings Reset function to reset all of the machine's settings to the settings originally set at the factory. Factory Reset takes more time than All Settings Reset. We strongly recommend you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine. Related Information • Reset Your Machine 521 Home > Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance • Replace Supplies • Clean the Machine • Check the Remaining Part Life • Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together • Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts 522 Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies Replace Supplies You must replace supplies when the machine indicates that the life of the supply is over. IMPORTANT To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations. Toner Cartridge Drum Unit NOTE • Be sure to seal the used supplies tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge. • Visit www.brother.com/original for instructions on how to return your used supplies to the Brother collection and recycling program. If your local Brother office does not have the collection program yet, or you choose not to return your used supply, discard the used supply according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, contact your local waste disposal office. • We recommend placing both the new and the used supplies on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally spilling or scattering the contents. • Using paper that is not a direct equivalent for a recommended print media may reduce the life of supplies and machine parts. • The projected life for each of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19752. Frequency of replacement will vary depending on the print volume, percentage of coverage, types of media used, and powering on/off the machine. • Frequency of replacing supplies except toner cartridges will vary depending on the print volume, types of media used, and powering on/off the machine. • Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water. 523 Both the toner cartridge and the drum unit feature an Integrated Circuit (IC) chip. DO NOT touch these surfaces. Touching the IC chips may cause contamination or damage, and may interfere with the machine's ability to detect these components. Related Information • Routine Maintenance • Replace the Toner Cartridge • Replace the Drum Unit Related Topics: • Error and Maintenance Messages 524 Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Toner Cartridge Replace the Toner Cartridge 1. Make sure the machine is turned on. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine. 4. Push down the green lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit. 5. Unpack the new toner cartridge. 525 6. Remove the protective cover. 7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and shake it from left to right several times, as shown. Then push it firmly into the drum unit until it locks into place. Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit. 8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left several times. Be sure to return the tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe. 526 9. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine. 10. Close the front cover of the machine. • After replacing a toner cartridge, DO NOT turn the machine off or open the front cover until the machine's display returns to Ready Mode. • The toner cartridge that comes with your Brother machine is an Inbox toner cartridge. • It is a good idea to keep a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the Toner Low warning. • DO NOT unpack the new toner cartridge until you are ready to install it. • If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened. • We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance. Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty. Related Information • Replace Supplies Related Topics: • Error and Maintenance Messages • Improve the Print Quality 527 Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies > Replace the Drum Unit Replace the Drum Unit 1. Make sure the machine is turned on. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine. 4. Push down the green lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit. 5. Unpack the new drum unit. 528 6. Remove the protective cover. 7. Push the toner cartridge firmly into the new drum unit until it locks into place. Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit. 8. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine. 9. Close the front cover of the machine. NOTE • Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and rotation of the drum and interaction with paper, toner, and other materials in the paper path. In designing this product, Brother decided to use the number of rotations of the drum as a reasonable determinant of the drum life. When a drum reaches the factoryestablished rotation limit corresponding to the rated page yield, the product’s LCD will advise you to replace the drum. The product will continue to function; however, print quality may not be optimal. • If an unpacked drum unit is placed in direct sunlight (or room light for long periods of time), the unit may be damaged. • There are many factors that determine the actual drum life, such as the temperature, humidity, type of paper, type of toner used and so on. Under ideal conditions, the average drum life is estimated at approximately 75,000 pages based on three pages per job and 45,000 pages based on one page per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages). The number of pages may be affected by a variety of factors including, but not limited to, media type and media size. 529 Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum. • The machine should be used only in a clean, dust-free environment with adequate ventilation. We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance. Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty. Related Information • Replace Supplies Related Topics: • Error and Maintenance Messages • Improve the Print Quality 530 Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine Clean the Machine Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure you clean the inside of the machine. If printed pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth. WARNING DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry, lint-free cloth. IMPORTANT • DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel. • To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations. Toner cartridge Drum unit 531 Both the toner cartridge and the drum unit feature an IC chip. DO NOT touch these surfaces. Touching the IC chips may cause contamination or damage, and may interfere with the machine's ability to detect these parts. Related Information • Routine Maintenance • Clean the Scanner • Clean the Touchscreen LCD • Clean the Corona Wire • Clean the Drum Unit • Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers 532 Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Scanner Clean the Scanner Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine. 1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. 2. Lift the document cover (1). Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water. 2 1 3 3. In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water. 2 1 4. (For automatic 2-sided scanning models) Open the scanner glass cover (1), and then clean the other white bar (2) and scanner glass strip (3). 1 2 3 5. Close the document cover. 6. Press to turn the machine on. Related Information • Clean the Machine 533 Related Topics: • Improve the Print Quality 534 Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Touchscreen LCD Clean the Touchscreen LCD Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine. IMPORTANT DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners (including ethanol). 1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. 2. Clean the touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. 3. Press to turn the machine on. Related Information • Clean the Machine 535 Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Corona Wire Clean the Corona Wire If you have print quality problems or the control panel displays [Drum !] status, clean the corona wire. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine. 3. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left several times. Be sure to return the tab to the Home position (a). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe. 536 4. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine. 5. Close the front cover of the machine. Related Information • Clean the Machine Related Topics: • Error and Maintenance Messages 537 Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Drum Unit Clean the Drum Unit If your printout has dots or other repeating marks at 94 mm intervals, the drum may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface. 1. Make sure the machine is in Ready mode. 2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Drum Dot Print]. 3. Press [Yes]. The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet. 4. Press . 5. Press and hold to turn the machine off. 6. Open the front cover. 7. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly from the machine. 8. Push down the green lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit. 538 9. Turn the drum unit as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the drum unit gear (1) is on the left side. 1 10. Use the numbered markers next to the drum roller to find the mark on the drum. For example, a dot in column 2 on the check sheet means that there is a mark in drum region “2”. 11. Turn the drum unit edge towards you while looking at the drum surface to find the mark. IMPORTANT To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the surface of the drum unit, only the edge. 539 12. Wipe the drum unit surface gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark or foreign material on the surface comes off. NOTE DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids. 13. Push the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit it locks into place. Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit. 14. Reinsert the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back into the machine. 15. Close the front cover of the machine. 16. Press to turn the machine on. Related Information • Clean the Machine Related Topics: • Improve the Print Quality 540 Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine > Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers periodically may prevent paper jams by ensuring that paper feeds correctly. Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information: Clean the Machine. If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows: 1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. 2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine. 3. If paper is loaded or something is stuck inside in the paper tray, remove it. 4. Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad on the paper tray to remove dust. 5. Wipe the two pick-up rollers inside the machine to remove dust. 6. Reload the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine. 7. Press to turn the machine on. 541 Related Information • Clean the Machine Related Topics: • Printing Problems 542 Home > Routine Maintenance > Check the Remaining Part Life Check the Remaining Part Life 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] > [Parts Life]. 2. Press the machine part you want to check. The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life. 3. Press . To display the approximate remaining life of the toner cartridge, press on the LCD. Related Information • Routine Maintenance 543 Home > Routine Maintenance > Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together WARNING • When you move the machine, carry the machine as shown in the illustration. DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910: • To prevent possible injuries, at least two people should lift the product by holding it at the front and back. • If the machine has Optional Tray(s) installed, remove the Optional Tray(s) BEFORE moving the machine. Attempting to move the machine without removing the Optional Tray(s) may cause injury to you or damage to the machine. • Pack the Optional Tray(s) separately in the original carton with original packing material. If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier. 1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. Leave the machine off for at least 10 minutes to cool down. 2. Disconnect all the cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket. Some models are equipped with a non-detachable AC power cord. If your cord is not detachable, fold it loosely and rest it on top of the machine so it packs easily. 3. Put the machine into the bag it originally came in. 544 4. Pack the machine, the printed materials, and the AC power cord (if applicable) in the original carton with the original packing material as shown. (The original packing material may differ depending on your country or model.) 5. Close the carton and tape it shut. 6. If you have a Lower Tray, repack it as shown. Related Information • Routine Maintenance 545 Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts Replace the following parts regularly to maintain the best print quality. The parts listed below must be replaced after printing approximately 50,000 pages 1 for the Paper Feeding Kits of the MP tray and approximately 200,000 pages 1 for the Paper Feeding Kits of the standard paper tray, the Paper Feeding Kits of the optional paper tray, Fuser Unit, and Laser Unit. Contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer when the following messages appear on the LCD: LCD Message Description Maintenance Replace the Fuser Unit. Replace Fuser 2 Maintenance Replace the Laser Unit. Replace Laser 2 Maintenance Replace PF Kit Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Standard Paper Tray. 123 Maintenance Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Optional Tray. Replace PF Kit 2 2 3 4 Maintenance Replace PF Kit Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Multi-purpose (MP) Tray. MP 2 3 Related Information • Routine Maintenance 1 Letter or A4 size 1-sided pages. 2 The replacement frequency depends on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage, and the type of media used. 3 The kit includes the roller holder assembly, separation pad, and separation pad spring for the paper tray or MP Tray. 4 If you use the Optional Tray(s) with your machine, this message will appear on the LCD. When the machine has multiple Optional Trays, the machine displays messages using numbers corresponding to each Optional Tray. 546 Home > Machine Settings Machine Settings Customise settings and features to make your machine a more efficient work tool. • Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management 547 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel • In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) • General Settings • Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut • Print Reports • Settings and Features Tables 548 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost.Temporary settings (for example, Contrast, Overseas Mode) are lost. During a power failure, the machine will retain the date and time and programmed fax timer jobs (for example, Delayed Fax) for approximately 60 hours. Other fax jobs in the machine's memory will not be lost. Related Information • Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel 549 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings General Settings • Adjust the Machine's Volume • Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically • Set Sleep Mode Countdown • About Deep Sleep Mode • Set Auto Power Off Mode • Set the Date and Time • Set the Time Zone • Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness • Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On • Set Your Station ID • Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode • Reduce Toner Consumption • Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction) • Reduce Printing Noise • Improve Print Output • Change the Language on the LCD 550 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust the Machine's Volume Adjust the Machine's Volume 1. Do one of the following: • For MFC models: [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume]. Press • For DCP models: Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Beep]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press one of the following options (MFC models): (The options will vary depending on your machine.) • [Ring] Adjust the ring volume. • [Beep] Adjust the volume of the beep you hear when you press a button, make a mistake, or after you send or receive a fax. • [Speaker] Adjust the speaker volume. 3. Select the [Off], [Low], [Med] or [High] option, and then press the option you want. 4. Press . Related Information • General Settings 551 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically You can program the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time. It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn. Make sure you have set the correct date and time in the Date & Time setting. This feature is available only in some countries. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Auto Daylight]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 552 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set Sleep Mode Countdown Set Sleep Mode Countdown The Sleep Mode (or Power Save Mode) setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep Mode, it acts as though it is turned off. The machine will wake up and start printing when it receives a print job or a fax. Use these instructions to set a time delay (countdown) before the machine enters Sleep Mode. • You can choose how long the machine must be idle before it goes into Sleep Mode. • The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a print job. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Sleep Time]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine will remain idle before entering Sleep Mode, and then press [OK]. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 553 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > About Deep Sleep Mode About Deep Sleep Mode If the machine is in Sleep Mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will automatically enter Deep Sleep Mode. The length of time is based on your specific model and settings. Deep Sleep Mode uses less power than Sleep Mode. Applicable Models Machine's LCD in Deep Sleep Mode DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/ The LCD backlight turns off and the MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ Power LED blinks. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Conditions That Will Wake the Machine • • The machine receives a job. Someone presses or the touchscreen LCD. Related Information • General Settings 554 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set Auto Power Off Mode Set Auto Power Off Mode If the machine is in Deep Sleep Mode for certain length of time, based on your model and settings, the machine will go into Power Off Mode automatically. The machine does not go into Power Off Mode when the machine is connected to a network or a telephone line, or has secure print data in the memory(available for certain models). To start printing, press 1. Press on the control panel and then send a print job. [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Auto Power Off]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the [Off], [1 hour], [2 hours], [4 hours] or [8 hours] option you want. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 555 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the Date and Time Set the Date and Time 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Date]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter the last two digits of the year using the LCD, and then press [OK]. 3. Enter the two digits for the month using the LCD, and then press [OK]. 4. Enter the two digits for the day using the LCD, and then press [OK]. 5. Press [Clock Type]. 6. Press [12h Clock] or [24h Clock]. 7. Press [Time]. 8. To enter the time, do one of the following: • If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 12-hour format) using the LCD. Press to select [AM] or [PM]. Press [OK]. • If you selected [24h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time (in 24-hour format) using the LCD. Press [OK]. (For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.) 9. Press . Related Information • General Settings 556 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set the Time Zone Set the Time Zone Set the time zone for your location on the machine. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Time Zone]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter your time zone. 3. Press [OK]. 4. Press . Related Information • General Settings 557 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, changing the brightness setting may help. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Backlight]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the [Light], [Med] or [Dark] option. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 558 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On Set how long the LCD backlight stays on. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Dim Timer]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press the [10 Secs], [20 Secs] or [30 Secs] option. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 559 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set Your Station ID Set Your Station ID Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Set the machine to print your Station ID and the fax's date and time at the top of each fax you send. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Station ID] > [Fax]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. 3. Press [Tel]. 4. Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. 5. Press [Name]. 6. Enter your name (up to 20 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK]. • Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. (The characters available may differ depending on your country.) If your machine displays • , press . If you enter an incorrect character, press d or c to move the cursor to it and press . Press the correct character. • To enter a space, press [Space] or c. • For more detailed information, see Related Information. 7. Press . Related Information • General Settings Related Topics: • How to Enter Text on Your Machine • Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine • Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine 560 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Your machine is set for a Tone dialling service. If you have a Pulse dialling (rotary) service, you must change the dialling mode. This feature is not available in some countries. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Tone/Pulse]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Tone] or [Pulse]. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 561 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce Toner Consumption Reduce Toner Consumption Using the Toner Save feature may reduce toner consumption. When Toner Save is set to on, the print on your documents appears lighter. We DO NOT recommend using the Toner Save feature for printing photo or greyscale images. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Toner Save]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings Related Topics: • Improve the Print Quality 562 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction) Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 This feature prevents users from sending a fax or call to the wrong number by mistake. You can set the machine to restrict dialling when you use the dial pad, Address Book, Shortcuts and LDAP search. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Dial Restriction]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press one of the following options: • [Dial Pad] • [Address Book] If you combine Address Book numbers when dialling, the numbers will be recognised as dial pad input and will not be restricted. • [Shortcuts] • [LDAP Server] 3. Press one of the following options: Option Description Enter # Twice The machine prompts you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same number correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will display an error message. On The machine restricts all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialling method. Off The machine does not restrict the dialling method. • The [Enter # Twice] setting will not work if you use an external phone before entering the number. You will not be asked to re-enter the number. • If you choose [On] or [Enter # Twice], you cannot use the Broadcasting feature. 4. Press . Related Information • General Settings 563 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Reduce Printing Noise Reduce Printing Noise The Quiet Mode setting can reduce printing noise. When Quiet Mode is turned on, the print speed becomes slower. The factory setting is off. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Quiet Mode]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [On] or [Off]. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 564 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Improve Print Output Improve Print Output If the printout is curled or the toner does not fix well, you can improve the print output. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Improve Output]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press [Off], [Reduce Curl], or [Toner Fixing]. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 565 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > General Settings > Change the Language on the LCD Change the Language on the LCD Change the LCD language if needed. This feature is not available in some countries. 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Local Language]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Press your language. 3. Press . Related Information • General Settings 566 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut • Add Shortcuts • Change or Delete Shortcuts • Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card 567 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut > Add Shortcuts Add Shortcuts You can add the Fax, Copy, Scan, Web Connect and Apps settings you use most frequently by saving them as your Shortcuts. Later you can press the Shortcut to apply these settings instead of manually re-entering them. Some Shortcut menus are not available depending on your model. These instructions describe how to add a Copy Shortcut. The steps for adding a Fax, Scan, Web Connect, or Apps Shortcut are very similar. >> DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN 1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.) 2. Press a tab. Swipe to display the tab if needed. 3. Press any to add a new Shortcut. 4. Press [Copy]. 5. Press the copy preset you want. 6. Press [Options]. 7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to change. 8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option you want. Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want. 9. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 10. Press [OK]. 11. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK]. 12. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK]. MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.) 2. Press a tab. Swipe to display the tab if needed. 3. Press any to add a new Shortcut. 4. Press [Copy]. 5. Press > to access the preset copy settings. 6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the copy presets, and then press the copy preset you want. 7. Press [Options]. 8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to change. 568 9. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option you want. Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want. 10. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK]. (If the [OK] button is displayed.) 11. Press [Save as Shortcut]. 12. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK]. 13. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK]. Related Information • Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut 569 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut > Change or Delete Shortcuts Change or Delete Shortcuts You cannot change a Web Connect Shortcut or Apps Shortcut. If you need to change them, delete them, and then add a new Shortcut. 1. Press [Shortcuts]. (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.) 2. Press a tab to display the Shortcut you want to change. Swipe to display the tab if needed. 3. Press the Shortcut you want to change. The settings for the Shortcut you selected appear. To delete the Shortcut or edit the name, press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear, and then follow the on-screen menus. 4. Press [Options]. 5. Change the settings for the Shortcut if needed. 6. Press [OK] (if needed). 7. When finished, press [Save as Shortcut]. 8. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK]. 9. Do one of the following: • To overwrite the Shortcut, press [Yes]. • If you do not want to overwrite the Shortcut, press [No] to enter a new Shortcut name. Press any to add a new Shortcut. Enter a new name using the LCD, and then press [OK]. To edit the name, hold down to delete the current name. Related Information • Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut 570 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut > Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card Related Models: MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 You can assign one machine Shortcut to your ID card. When you touch your ID card to the machine's NFC symbol, your personal Shortcut will automatically appear on the touchscreen. • You cannot use the same ID card for different Shortcuts. • To use the ID card for another Shortcut, unregister the card first, and then register it with the new Shortcut. 1. Press the tab that contains the Shortcut you want to assign to your ID card. 2. Press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear. 3. Press [Register Card/NFC]. 4. Touch the ID card to the NFC symbol. 5. Press [Register]. The Shortcut is assigned to the ID Card. Related Information • Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut 571 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports Print Reports • Reports • Print a Report 572 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Reports Reports The following reports are available: XMIT Verify (For models with facsimile function) The XMIT Verify report prints a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission. Address Book The Address Book report prints a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book memory. Fax Journal (For models with facsimile function) The Fax Journal prints a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means Transmit, RX means Receive.) User Settings The User Settings report prints a list of your current settings. Printer Settings The Printer Settings report prints a list of your current printer settings. Network Configuration (Models with network functionality) The Network Configuration report prints a list of your current network settings. Print File List The Print File List prints a list of the fonts and print macro/stream setting stored in the machine. Drum Dot Print The Drum Dot Print prints the drum dot sheet, which helps when it is time to clean the drum unit. WLAN Report (Models with wireless network functionality) The WLAN Report prints the wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis. Related Information • Print Reports 573 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Print Reports > Print a Report Print a Report 1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports]. If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu. 2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the report you want to print, and then press it. 3. Do one of the following: • • If you choose [XMIT Verify], do one of the following: - To view the Transmission Verification Report, press [View on LCD]. - To print the Transmission Verification Report, press [Print Report]. If you choose other reports, go to next step. 4. Press [Yes]. 5. Press . Related Information • Print Reports 574 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables Settings and Features Tables The Settings tables will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine’s programs. • Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) • Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW) • Features Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) • Features Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) • Features Tables (DCP-L5510DW) 575 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables > Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Settings Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 >> [General Setup] >> [Shortcut Settings] >> [Fax] >> [Printer] >> [Network] >> [Print Reports] >> [Machine Info.] >> [Initial Setup] >> [Admin Settings] [General Setup] [All Settings] > [General Setup] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Tray Setting Paper Type MP Tray - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the MP tray. Tray 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the standard paper tray. Tray 2 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 2). Tray 3 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 3). Tray 4 1 2 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 4). Tray 5 1 2 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 5). MP Tray - Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray. Tray 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the standard paper tray. Tray 2 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 2). Tray 3 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 3). Tray 4 1 2 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 4). Tray 5 1 2 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 5). Tray Use: Copy - - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy. Tray Use: Fax - - Select the tray you want to use for printing a Fax. Tray Use: Print - - Select the tray you want to use to Print. Print Position X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Paper Size MP Tray 576 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Tray Setting Print Position MP Tray Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 3) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 3) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 4) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 4) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. X Offset Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages) of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 5) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots in 300 dpi. Y Offset Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages) of paper you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 5) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots in 300 dpi. Tray 2 1 Tray 3 1 Tray 4 1 2 Tray 5 1 2 Skip Tray 1 - - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded with the wrong size paper. Separator Tray - - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the separator paper, which is inserted between each print job. Paper Low Notice - Select whether or not to display a message indicating the paper tray is nearly empty. (available for certain Notice models) Level - Select the minimum paper level that will trigger the message. Check Paper - Select whether or not to display a message indicating you must check the paper type and paper size. 1 Paper Low Notice - 577 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Volume Ring - - Adjust the ring volume. Beep - - Adjust the beeper volume. Speaker - - Adjust the speaker volume. LCD Settings Backlight - - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight. Dim Timer - - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after returning to the Home screen. Notice Settings Document Alert - - Select whether to alert you when the document is left on the scanner glass. Scan Result(Skip Blank Page) - - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped pages after scanning is completed. Eco Mode - - Turn the following machine settings on at the same time: Ecology (available for certain models) • 2-sided Print: Long Edge 3 • Sleep Time: 0 Min • Dim Timer: 10 Secs • Quiet Mode: On 3 • Toner Save: On 3 Toner Save - - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge. Sleep Time - - Set how much time should pass before the machine enters Power Saving mode. Quiet Mode - - Decrease printing noise. Auto Power Off - - Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode. Improve Output - - - Enable the Reduce Curl feature or the Toner Fixing feature to improve print output. Delete Storage Macro ID - - Delete the registered Macro data. Stream ID - - Delete the registered Stream data. Font ID - - Delete the registered Font data. Delete All - - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font data to the factory settings. Initialise USB Flash Drive - - Initialise the USB flash drive for USB Storage Print. Initialising the USB flash drive takes more than 40 minutes. (Available only when the USB flash drive is selected in the Job Save Location menu.) This initialisation process does not make the data completely unrecoverable. 1 Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed. 2 Supported models only. 3 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain machine settings in Web Based Management. 578 [Shortcut Settings] [All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions (Select a shortcut button) Rename Change the shortcut name. Edit Change the shortcut settings. Delete Delete the shortcut. Register Card/NFC Assign a shortcut to an ID card. Delete Card/NFC Remove a shortcut from an ID card. [Fax] [All Settings] > [Fax] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Setup Receive Ring Delay - Set the number of rings before the machine answers in Fax or Fax/Tel mode. Receive Mode - Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs. F/T Ring Time - Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in Fax/Tel mode. Fax Preview - View received faxes on the LCD. Fax Detect - Receive fax messages automatically when you answer a call and hear fax tones. Remote Codes Remote Codes Answer calls at an extension or external telephone and use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off. You can personalise the codes. Act.Code Deact.Code Auto Reduction - Reduce the size of incoming faxes. PC Fax Receive - Set the machine to send faxes to your computer. If you enable this feature, you can turn on the Backup Print safety feature. Memory Receive Off Fax Forward Fax Storage Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine). If you select Fax Forward or Fax Storage, you can turn on the Backup Print safety feature. Setup Send Forward to Cloud Forward incoming faxes to the online service. Forward to Network Forward incoming faxes to a network destination. Fax Rx Stamp - Print the received time and date on the top of incoming faxes. 2-sided - Print incoming faxes on both sides of the paper. Batch TX - Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission. Coverpage Note 5. Set up your own comments for the fax cover page. 6. 579 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Setup Send Auto Redial - Set the machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes, if the fax did not go through because the line was busy. Destination - Set the machine to display the destination information on the LCD during fax dialling. XMIT Report - Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification Report. Report Setting Journal Period Journal Period Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax Journal. Time If you select an option other than Off and Every 50 Faxes, you can set the time for the option. Day If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the week. Print Document - - Print incoming faxes stored in the machine's memory. Remote Access - - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval. - Restrict the dialling when using the dial pad. Address Book - Restrict the dialling when using the Address Book. Shortcuts - Restrict the dialling when using a Shortcut. LDAP Server - Restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers. Remaining Jobs - - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's memory and cancel selected jobs. Miscellaneous BT Call Sign - Use with BT Call Sign. Dial Restriction Dial Pad (U.K. only) [Printer] [All Settings] > [Printer] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Emulation - - Select the emulation mode. Resolution - - Select a print resolution. Density - - Increase or decrease the print density. Print Settings - - Set your print settings to Text or Graphics. Print Options Font List HP LaserJet Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts. BR-Script 3 2-sided Test Print - Print a test page. 2-sided Print - Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or short edge. Single Image - For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time. When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, you must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided Feed for Letterhead or Preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse side. Auto Continue - - Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper size errors or media type errors, and use paper from other trays. Paper Type - - Set the paper type. 580 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Paper Size - - Set the paper size. Copies - - Set the number of printed pages. Orientation - - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape orientation. Print Position - - Access the Print Position setting menus. Auto FF - - Allow the machine to print any remaining data automatically. HP LaserJet Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Symbol Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto CR - ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT Epson FX-850 Auto WRAP - Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the right margin. Auto SKIP - Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. Tray Command - Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you use the HP drivers. Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Character Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the option you want. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR 581 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Epson FX-850 Auto Mask - Set the top and bottom margins to two-lines each. When you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top Margin and Bottom Margin settings. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. IBM Proprinter Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Character Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the option you want. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto CR - ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT Auto Mask - Set the top and bottom margins to two-lines each. When you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top Margin and Bottom Margin settings. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. BR-Script 3 Error Print - Choose whether the machine prints the error information when errors occur. PDF Multiple Page - Set the page layout when printing multiple pages. PDF Print Options - Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments (Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text. PDF Fit to Page - Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the PDF file to fit the selected paper size. Carbon Copy - Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function. Copies - Set the number of printed pages. Copy1 Tray - Select the tray you use for Copy1. Copy1 Macro - Select a macro/stream for Copy1. Carbon Menu 582 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Carbon Menu Copy2 Tray... Copy8 Tray - Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8. Copy2 Macro... Copy8 Macro - Select a macro/stream for Copy2 to Copy8. - - Select the location where you want to save print jobs. - - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings. Job Save Location (available for certain models) Reset Printer [Network] [All Settings] > [Network] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. Node Name - Enter the Node name. (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. Ethernet - - Select the Ethernet link mode. Wired Status - - View the current wired status. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default - - Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings. - - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually. - - Configure your wireless network settings manually. DNS Server 1 (For wireless network models) Wired Enable 1 (For wireless network models) WLAN(Wi-Fi) 1 (For wireless network models) Find Wi-Fi Network 583 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions WLAN(Wi-Fi) 1 TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. Node Name - Enter the Node name. (For wireless network models) (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. WPS/Push Button - - Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method. WPS/PIN Code - - Configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN. WLAN Status Status - View the current wireless network status. Signal - View the current wireless network signal strength. SSID - View the current SSID. Comm. Mode - View the current Communication mode. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default - - Restore the wireless network settings to the factory settings. WLAN Enable - - Turns the wireless interface on or off. Manual - - (For wireless network Group Owner models) Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings manually. - - Set your machine as the Group Owner. Push Button - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using the onebutton push method. PIN Code - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using WPS with a PIN code. DNS Server Wi-Fi Direct 1 584 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wi-Fi Direct 1 Device Information Device Name - View your machine's device name. SSID - View the Group Owner's SSID. (For wireless network models) When the machine is not connected, the LCD displays Not Connected. Status Information IP Address - View your machine's current IP Address. Status - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network status. Signal - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network signal strength. When your machine acts as Group Owner, the LCD always indicates a strong signal. NFC I/F Enable - - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on or off. - - - Turn the NFC function on or off. Mail Address - - Enter the email address. (available for certain models) E-mail (Up to 255 characters) Setup Server SMTP POP3/IMAP4 Server Enter the SMTP server name and address. Port Enter the SMTP port number. Auth. for SMTP Select the Security method for email notification. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. Protocol Select the protocol for receiving an email from the server. Server Enter the server name and address. Port Enter the port number. Mailbox Name Enter the mailbox name. Mailbox Password Enter the password to log into the server. (Up to 255 characters) (Up to 128 characters) Select Folder Select the specified folder in the mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. APOP Turn APOP on or off. 585 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions E-mail Setup Mail RX Auto Polling Auto Polling Check the server for new messages automatically. Poll Frequency Set the interval for checking new messages on the server. Header - Select the contents of the email header to be printed. Del/Read Error Mail - The POP3 server deletes error emails automatically. The IMAP4 server deletes error emails automatically after you read them. Notification - Receive notification messages. Sender Subject - View the subject. Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents. Setup Mail TX Maximum Size(MB) Notification Setup Relay Web Based Mgmt Send notification messages. Relay Broadcast - Relay a document to another fax machine. Relay Domain Relay ## Register the Domain name. Relay Report - Print the relay Broadcast Report. E-mail IFAX XMIT Report Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification Report. XMIT Report Manual Receive - - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server for new messages manually. Proxy Settings Proxy Connection - Change the Web connection settings. Address - Port - User Name - Password - - - Report Setting Web Connect Settings - - Enable or disable Web Based Management. If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management. Fax to Server Fax to Server - - Prefix - - Suffix - - IPsec - - - IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services. We recommend contacting your network administrator before changing this setting. Global Detect Allow Detect - - Enable or disable Global Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user Select the network connection type. 586 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Global Detect Network Reset 1 Descriptions unintentionally connects to a global network. Reject Access - - Disable connections to the global network. - - - Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. [Print Reports] [All Settings] > [Print Reports] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions XMIT Verify View on LCD Display a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission. Print Report Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission. Address Book - Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book. Fax Journal - Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.) User Settings - Print a list of your User settings. Printer Settings - Print a list of your Printer settings. Network Configuration - Print a list of your Network settings. Print File List - Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory. Drum Dot Print - Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet. - Print the wireless LAN connection results. WLAN Report 1 (For wireless network models) 1 (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. [Machine Info.] [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Serial No. - Check your machine's serial number. Firmware Version Main Version Check your machine's firmware version. Security Version Firmware Update - Update your machine to the latest firmware. Firmware Auto Check - View firmware information on the Main Home screen. Page Counter Check the total number of pages the machine has printed. Total Fax Copy Print Other Parts Life 1 Drum Display the remaining life of the drum unit. Fuser Display the remaining life of the fuser unit. 587 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Parts Life 1 Laser Unit Display the remaining life of the laser unit. PF Kit MP Display the remaining life of PF Kit MP. PF Kit 1 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 1. PF Kit 2 2 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 2. PF Kit 3 2 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 3. PF Kit 4 2 3 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 4. PF Kit 5 2 3 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 5. 1 The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use. 2 Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed. 3 Supported models only. [Initial Setup] [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Date & Time Date Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the faxes you send. Time Station ID Clock Type Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Auto Daylight Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time. Time Zone Set your time zone. Fax Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you fax. Tel Name Tone/Pulse - Select the dialling mode. Dial Tone - Shorten the dial tone detection pause. Phone Line Set - Select the telephone line type. Compatibility - Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties. VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic (for VoIP). Reset Machine Reset Restore all the machine settings that you have changed. Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. Address Book & Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings. Fax Local Language All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings. Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings. - Change your LCD language. (Available only for certain countries) 588 [Admin Settings] [Admin Settings] Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Home Screen Settings Icons - - Delete icons, add icons, or move icons to other places on the Home screens. Background Colour - - Change the background colour on the touchscreen to White or Black. Tabs Rename Tab 1 Change the name of the tabs. Tab 2 Tab 3 Tab 4 Tab 5 Tab 6 Tab 7 Tab 8 Main Home Screen - Set your Main Home screen. Display Information IP Address - Select whether or not to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screens. Home Screen Settings Reset - - Restore Home screen settings back to the factory settings. Other Screen Settings Copy Screen - - Set the default Copy screen settings. Scan Screen - - Set the default Scan screen settings. Restriction Management User Restriction Function - - Enable or disable restriction functions, for example, Secure Function Lock. Setting Lock - - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the machine’s settings. Setting Lock Details - - Select the specific machine settings you want to restrict unauthorised users from changing. - - - Register or change the password to log on to the Admin Settings menu. Password Related Information • Settings and Features Tables 589 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables > Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Settings Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> [Settings] >> [General Setup] >> [Shortcut Settings] >> [Fax] >> [Printer] >> [Network] (MFC-L5710DW) >> [Network] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5715DN) >> [Print Reports] >> [Machine Info.] >> [Initial Setup] [Settings] [Settings] Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions - Access the Date and Time setting menus. Toner Life View the approximate remaining toner life. Test Print Print a test page. Toner Cartridge Check View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine. Wired LAN Access the Wired LAN setting menus. WLAN(Wi-Fi) Access the WLAN setting menus. Date & Time Toner Network (For wireless network models) Fax Preview - View received faxes on the LCD. Tray Setting - Access the tray setting menus. Eco Mode Access the Eco Mode setting menu. - All Settings - Configure the detailed settings. [General Setup] [All Settings] > [General Setup] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Tray Setting Paper Type MP Tray - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the MP tray. Tray 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the standard paper tray. Tray 2 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 2). Tray 3 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 3). MP Tray - Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray. Paper Size 590 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Tray Setting Paper Size Tray 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the standard paper tray. Tray 2 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 2). Tray 3 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 3). Tray Use: Copy - - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy. Tray Use: Fax - - Select the tray you want to use for printing a Fax. Tray Use: Print - - Select the tray you want to use to Print. Print Position MP Tray X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 2 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 3 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 3) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 3) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Skip Tray 1 - - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded with the wrong size paper. Separator Tray - - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the separator paper, which is inserted between each print job. Check Paper - - Select whether or not to display a message indicating you must check the paper type and paper size. Ring - - Adjust the ring volume. Beep - - Adjust the beeper volume. Speaker - - Adjust the speaker volume. 1 Volume 591 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions LCD Settings Backlight - - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight. Dim Timer - - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after returning to the Home screen. Screen Settings Home Screen - - Set the Main Home screen. Scan Screen - - Set the default Scan screen. Display Information IP Address - Select whether to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screen. Notice Settings Scan Result(Skip Blank Page) - - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped pages after scanning is completed. Ecology Eco Mode - - Turn the following machine settings on at the same time: • 2-sided Print: Long Edge 2 • Sleep Time: 0 Min • Dim Timer: 10 Secs • Quiet Mode: On 2 • Toner Save: On 2 Toner Save - - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge. Sleep Time - - Set how much time should pass before the machine enters Power Saving mode. Quiet Mode - - Decrease printing noise. Auto Power Off - - Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode. Improve Output - - - Enable the Reduce Curl feature or the Toner Fixing feature to improve print output. Setting Lock Set Password - - Lock Off⇒On - - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the machine’s settings. Delete Storage Macro ID - - Delete the registered Macro data. Stream ID - - Delete the registered Stream data. Font ID - - Delete the registered Font data. Delete All - - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font data to the factory settings. 1 Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed. 2 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain machine settings in Web Based Management. [Shortcut Settings] [All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings] Level 3 Level 4 (Select a shortcut button) Rename Descriptions Change the shortcut name. Edit Change the shortcut settings. Delete Delete the shortcut. Register Card/NFC Assign a shortcut to an ID card. Delete Card/NFC Remove a shortcut from an ID card. 592 [Fax] [All Settings] > [Fax] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Setup Receive Ring Delay - Set the number of rings before the machine answers in Fax or Fax/Tel mode. Receive Mode - Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs. F/T Ring Time - Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in Fax/Tel mode. Fax Preview - View received faxes on the LCD. Fax Detect - Receive fax messages automatically when you answer a call and hear fax tones. Remote Codes Remote Codes Answer calls at an extension or external telephone and use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off. You can personalise the codes. Act.Code Deact.Code Auto Reduction - Reduce the size of incoming faxes. PC Fax Receive - Set the machine to send faxes to your computer. If you enable this feature, you can turn on the Backup Print safety feature. Memory Receive Off Fax Forward Fax Storage Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine). If you select Fax Forward or Fax Storage, you can turn on the Backup Print safety feature. Setup Send Forward to Cloud Forward incoming faxes to the online service. Forward to Network Forward incoming faxes to a network destination. Fax Rx Stamp - Print the received time and date on the top of incoming faxes. 2-sided - Print incoming faxes on both sides of the paper. Batch TX - Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission. Coverpage Note 5. Set up your own comments for the fax cover page. 6. Report Setting Auto Redial - Set the machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes, if the fax did not go through because the line was busy. Destination - Set the machine to display the destination information on the LCD during fax dialling. XMIT Report - Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification Report. Journal Period Journal Period Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax Journal. Time If you select an option other than Off and Every 50 Faxes, you can set the time for the option. Day If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the week. 593 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Print Document - - Print incoming faxes stored in the machine's memory. Remote Access - - Set your own code for Remote Retrieval. - Restrict the dialling when using the dial pad. Address Book - Restrict the dialling when using the Address Book. Shortcuts - Restrict the dialling when using a Shortcut. LDAP Server - Restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers. Remaining Jobs - - Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's memory and cancel selected jobs. Miscellaneous BT Call Sign - Use with BT Call Sign. Dial Restriction Dial Pad (U.K. only) [Printer] [All Settings] > [Printer] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Emulation - - Select the emulation mode. Resolution - - Select a print resolution. Density - - Increase or decrease the print density. Print Settings - - Set your print settings to Text or Graphics. Print Options HP LaserJet Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts. Font List BR-Script 3 2-sided Test Print - Print a test page. 2-sided Print - Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or short edge. Single Image - For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time. When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, you must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided Feed for Letterhead or Preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse side. Auto Continue - - Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper size errors or media type errors, and use paper from other trays. Paper Type - - Set the paper type. Paper Size - - Set the paper size. Copies - - Set the number of printed pages. Orientation - - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape orientation. Print Position - - Access the Print Position setting menus. Auto FF - - Allow the machine to print any remaining data automatically. HP LaserJet Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. 594 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 HP LaserJet Descriptions (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Symbol Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto CR - ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT Epson FX-850 Auto WRAP - Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the right margin. Auto SKIP - Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. Tray Command - Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you use the HP drivers. Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Character Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the option you want.. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto Mask - Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top Margin and Bottom Margin settings. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. IBM Proprinter Font No. This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. 595 Level 3 Level 4 IBM Proprinter Font Pitch Level 5 Descriptions - Set the font pitch. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Character Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the option you want. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto CR - ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT Auto Mask - Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top Margin and Bottom Margin settings. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. BR-Script 3 Error Print - Choose whether the machine prints the error information when errors occur. PDF Multiple Page - Set the page layout when printing multiple pages. PDF Print Options - Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments (Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text. PDF Fit to Page - Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the PDF file to fit the selected paper size. Carbon Copy - Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function. Copies - Set the number of printed pages. Copy1 Tray - Select the tray you use for Copy1. Copy1 Macro - Select a macro/stream for Copy1. Copy2 Tray... Copy8 Tray - Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8. Copy2 Macro... Copy8 Macro - Select a macro/stream for Copy2 to Copy8. - - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings. Carbon Menu Reset Printer [Network] (MFC-L5710DW) [All Settings] > [Network] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. 596 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired LAN TCP/IP Node Name - Enter the Node name. (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. Ethernet - - Select the Ethernet link mode. Wired Status - - View the current wired status. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default - - Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings. Wired Enable - - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually. Find Wi-Fi Network - - Configure your wireless network settings manually. TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. Node Name - Enter the Node name. DNS Server WLAN(Wi-Fi) (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. - Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method. DNS Server WPS/Push Button - 597 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions WLAN(Wi-Fi) WPS/PIN Code - - Configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN. WLAN Status Status - View the current wireless network status. Signal - View the current wireless network signal strength. SSID - View the current SSID. Comm. Mode - View the current Communication mode. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default - - Restore the wireless network settings to the factory settings. WLAN Enable - - Turns the wireless interface on or off. Manual - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings manually. Group Owner - - Set your machine as the Group Owner. Push Button - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using the one-button push method. PIN Code - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using WPS with a PIN code. Device Information Device Name - View your machine's device name. SSID - View the Group Owner's SSID. Wi-Fi Direct When the machine is not connected, the LCD displays Not Connected. Status Information IP Address - View your machine's current IP Address. Status - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network status. Signal - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network signal strength. When your machine acts as Group Owner, the LCD always indicates a strong signal. E-mail I/F Enable - - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on or off. Mail Address - - Enter the email address. (Up to 255 characters) Setup Server SMTP Server Enter the SMTP server name and address. Port Enter the SMTP port number. Auth. for SMTP Select the Security method for email notification. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. 598 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions E-mail Setup Server POP3/IMAP4 Protocol Select the protocol for receiving an email from the server. Server Enter the server name and address. Port Enter the port number. Mailbox Name Enter the mailbox name. Mailbox Password Enter the password to log into the server. (Up to 255 characters) (Up to 128 characters) Setup Mail RX Setup Mail TX Select Folder Select the specified folder in the mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. APOP Turn APOP on or off. Auto Polling Check the server for new messages automatically. Poll Frequency Set the interval for checking new messages on the server. Header - Select the contents of the email header to be printed. Del/Read Error Mail - The POP3 server deletes error emails automatically. The IMAP4 server deletes error emails automatically after you read them. Notification - Receive notification messages. Sender Subject - View the subject. Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents. Auto Polling Maximum Size(MB) Notification - Send notification messages. Relay Broadcast - Relay a document to another fax machine. Relay Domain Relay ## Register the Domain name. Relay Report - Print the relay Broadcast Report. E-mail IFAX XMIT Report Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification Report. XMIT Report Manual Receive - - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server for new messages manually. Proxy Settings Proxy Connection - Change the Web connection settings. Address - Port - User Name - Password - Setup Relay Report Setting Web Connect Settings 599 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Web Based Mgmt - - - Enable or disable Web Based Management. If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management. Fax to Server Fax to Server - - Prefix - - Suffix - - IPsec - - - IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services. We recommend contacting your network administrator before changing this setting. Global Detect Allow Detect - - Enable or disable Global Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user unintentionally connects to a global network. Reject Access - - Disable connections to the global network. - - - Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. Network Reset Select the network connection type. [Network] (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5715DN) [All Settings] > [Network] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. Node Name - Enter the Node name. (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. - - Select the Ethernet link mode. DNS Server Ethernet 600 Level 3 Level 4 Wired LAN E-mail Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired Status - - View the current wired status. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Wired Enable - - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually. Mail Address - - Enter the email address. (Up to 255 characters) Setup Server SMTP POP3/IMAP4 Server Enter the SMTP server name and address. Port Enter the SMTP port number. Auth. for SMTP Select the Security method for email notification. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. Protocol Select the protocol for receiving an email from the server. Server Enter the server name and address. Port Enter the port number. Mailbox Name Enter the mailbox name. Mailbox Password Enter the password to log into the server. (Up to 255 characters) (Up to 128 characters) Setup Mail RX Setup Mail TX Select Folder Select the specified folder in the mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. APOP Turn APOP on or off. Auto Polling Check the server for new messages automatically. Poll Frequency Set the interval for checking new messages on the server. Header - Select the contents of the email header to be printed. Del/Read Error Mail - The POP3 server deletes error emails automatically. The IMAP4 server deletes error emails automatically after you read them. Notification - Receive notification messages. Sender Subject - View the subject. Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents. Auto Polling Maximum Size(MB) Notification - Send notification messages. 601 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions E-mail Setup Relay Relay Broadcast - Relay a document to another fax machine. Relay Domain Relay ## Register the Domain name. Relay Report - Print the relay Broadcast Report. Report Setting E-mail XMIT Report IFAX XMIT Report Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification Report. Manual Receive - - Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server for new messages manually. Proxy Settings Proxy Connection - Change the Web connection settings. Web Connect Settings Web Based Mgmt - Address - Port - User Name - Password - - - Enable or disable Web Based Management. If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management. Fax to Server Fax to Server - - Prefix - - Suffix - - - - - IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services. We recommend contacting your network administrator before changing this setting. Global Detect Allow Detect - - Enable or disable Global Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user unintentionally connects to a global network. - - Disable connections to the global network. - - Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. IPsec Reject Access Network Reset - Select the network connection type. [Print Reports] [All Settings] > [Print Reports] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions XMIT Verify View on LCD Display a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission. Print Report Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission. Address Book - Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book. Fax Journal - Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.) User Settings - Print a list of your User settings. 602 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Printer Settings - Print a list of your Printer settings. Network Configuration - Print a list of your Network settings. Print File List - Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory. Drum Dot Print - Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet. WLAN Report - Print the wireless LAN connection results. (For wireless network models) [Machine Info.] [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Serial No. - Check your machine's serial number. Firmware Version Main Version Check your machine's firmware version. Security Version Firmware Update - Update your machine to the latest firmware. Firmware Auto Check - View firmware information on the Main Home screen. Page Counter Check the total number of pages the machine has printed. Total Fax Copy Print Other Parts Life 1 Drum Display the remaining life of the drum unit. Fuser Display the remaining life of the fuser unit. Laser Unit Display the remaining life of the laser unit. PF Kit MP Display the remaining life of PF Kit MP. PF Kit 1 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 1. PF Kit 2 2 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 2. PF Kit 3 2 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 3. 1 The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use. 2 Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed. [Initial Setup] [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Date & Time Date Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the faxes you send. Time Station ID Clock Type Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Auto Daylight Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time. Time Zone Set your time zone. Fax Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you fax. Tel 603 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Station ID Name Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you fax. Tone/Pulse - Select the dialling mode. Dial Tone - Shorten the dial tone detection pause. Phone Line Set - Select the telephone line type. Compatibility - Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties. VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic (for VoIP). Reset Machine Reset Restore all the machine settings that you have changed. Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. Address Book & Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings. Fax Local Language All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings. Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings. - Change your LCD language. (Available only for certain countries) Related Information • Settings and Features Tables 604 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables > Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW) Settings Tables (DCP-L5510DW) Related Models: DCP-L5510DW >> [Settings] >> [General Setup] >> [Shortcut Settings] >> [Printer] >> [Network] (DCP-L5510DW) >> [Print Reports] >> [Machine Info.] >> [Initial Setup] [Settings] [Settings] Level 1 Level 2 Descriptions - Access the Date and Time setting menus. Toner Life View the approximate remaining toner life. Test Print Print a test page. Toner Cartridge Check View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine. Wired LAN Access the Wired LAN setting menus. WLAN(Wi-Fi) Access the WLAN setting menus. Date & Time Toner Network (For wireless network models) Wi-Fi Direct - Access the Wi-Fi Direct setting menus. Tray Setting - Access the tray setting menus. Eco Mode - Access the Eco Mode setting menu. All Settings - Configure the detailed settings. (For wireless network models) [General Setup] [All Settings] > [General Setup] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Tray Setting Paper Type MP Tray - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the MP tray. Tray 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the standard paper tray. Tray 2 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 2). Tray 3 1 - Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 3). 605 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Tray Setting Paper Size MP Tray - Select the paper size you loaded in the MP tray. Tray 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the standard paper tray. Tray 2 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 2). Tray 3 1 - Select the paper size you loaded in the Optional Tray (Tray 3). Tray Use: Copy - - Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy. Tray Use: Print - - Select the tray you want to use to Print. Print Position MP Tray X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 2 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 2) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Tray 3 1 X Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 3) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Y Offset Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray (Tray 3) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi. Skip Tray 1 - - Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded with the wrong size paper. Separator Tray - - Select the tray that contains the paper used as the separator paper, which is inserted between each print job. Check Paper - - Select whether or not to display a message indicating you must check the paper type and paper size. Beep - - - Adjust the beeper volume. LCD Settings Backlight - - Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight. Dim Timer - - Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after returning to the Home screen. 1 606 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Screen Settings Home Screen - - Set the Main Home screen. Scan Screen - - Set the default Scan screen. Display Information IP Address - Select whether to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screen. Notice Settings Scan Result(Skip Blank Page) - - Displays the total scanned pages and skipped pages after scanning is completed. Ecology Eco Mode - - Turn the following machine settings on at the same time: • 2-sided Print: Long Edge 2 • Sleep Time: 0 Min • Dim Timer: 10 Secs • Quiet Mode: On 2 • Toner Save: On 2 Toner Save - - Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge. Sleep Time - - Set how much time should pass before the machine enters Power Saving mode. Quiet Mode - - Decrease printing noise. Auto Power Off - - Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode. Improve Output - - - Enable the Reduce Curl feature or the Toner Fixing feature to improve print output. Setting Lock Set Password - - Lock Off⇒On - - Restrict unauthorised users from changing the machine’s settings. Delete Storage Macro ID - - Delete the registered Macro data. Stream ID - - Delete the registered Stream data. Font ID - - Delete the registered Font data. Delete All - - Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font data to the factory settings. 1 Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed. 2 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain machine settings in Web Based Management. [Shortcut Settings] [All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings] Level 3 Level 4 (Select a shortcut button) Rename Descriptions Change the shortcut name. Edit Change the shortcut settings. Delete Delete the shortcut. Register Card/NFC Assign a shortcut to an ID card. Delete Card/NFC Remove a shortcut from an ID card. 607 [Printer] [All Settings] > [Printer] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Emulation - - Select the emulation mode. Resolution - - Select a print resolution. Density - - Increase or decrease the print density. Print Settings - - Set your print settings to Text or Graphics. Print Options HP LaserJet Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts. Font List BR-Script 3 2-sided Test Print - Print a test page. 2-sided Print - Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or short edge. Single Image - For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time. When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, you must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided Feed for Letterhead or Preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse side. Auto Continue - - Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper size errors or media type errors, and use paper from other trays. Paper Type - - Set the paper type. Paper Size - - Set the paper size. Copies - - Set the number of printed pages. Orientation - - Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape orientation. Print Position - - Access the Print Position setting menus. Auto FF - - Allow the machine to print any remaining data automatically. HP LaserJet Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Symbol Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto CR - ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT Auto WRAP - Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the right margin. Auto SKIP - Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. 608 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions HP LaserJet Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. Tray Command - Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you use the HP drivers. Font No. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. Epson FX-850 Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Character Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the option you want. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto Mask - Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top Margin and Bottom Margin settings. Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. Font No. Set the font number. Soft Font No. Set the soft font number. - Set the font pitch. IBM Proprinter Font No. Font Pitch This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your Brother machine. (Available only for certain fonts.) Font Point - Set the font size. (Available only for certain fonts.) Character Set - Select the symbol or character set. Table Print - Print the code table. If Change Emulation appears on the LCD, choose the option you want. Auto LF - ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR Auto CR - ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT Auto Mask - Set the top and bottom margins to two-line each. When you set Auto Mask to On, this setting overrides the Top Margin and Bottom Margin settings. 609 Level 3 Level 5 Descriptions IBM Proprinter Left Margin - Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi. Right Margin - Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi. Top Margin - Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper. Bottom Margin - Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper. Lines - Set the number of lines on each page. BR-Script 3 Error Print - Choose whether the machine prints the error information when errors occur. PDF Multiple Page - Set the page layout when printing multiple pages. PDF Print Options - Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments (Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text. PDF Fit to Page - Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the PDF file to fit the selected paper size. Carbon Copy - Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function. Copies - Set the number of printed pages. Copy1 Tray - Select the tray you use for Copy1. Copy1 Macro - Select a macro/stream for Copy1. Copy2 Tray... Copy8 Tray - Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8. Copy2 Macro... Copy8 Macro - Select a macro/stream for Copy2 to Copy8. - - Restore the machine settings to the factory settings. Carbon Menu Reset Printer Level 4 [Network] (DCP-L5510DW) [All Settings] > [Network] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired LAN TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. Node Name - Enter the Node name. (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. DNS Server APIPA 610 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wired LAN TCP/IP IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. Ethernet - - Select the Ethernet link mode. Wired Status - - View the current wired status. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default - - Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings. Wired Enable - - Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually. Find Wi-Fi Network - - Configure your wireless network settings manually. TCP/IP Boot Method IP Boot Tries Select the Boot method that best suits your needs. IP Address - Enter the IP address. Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet mask. Gateway - Enter the Gateway address. Node Name - Enter the Node name. WLAN(Wi-Fi) (Up to 32 characters) WINS Configuration - Select the WINS configuration mode. WINS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server. Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. APIPA - Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically. IPv6 - Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off. WPS/Push Button - - Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method. WPS/PIN Code - - Configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN. WLAN Status Status - View the current wireless network status. Signal - View the current wireless network signal strength. SSID - View the current SSID. Comm. Mode - View the current Communication mode. MAC Address - - View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default - - Restore the wireless network settings to the factory settings. WLAN Enable - - Turns the wireless interface on or off. DNS Server 611 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Wi-Fi Direct Manual - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings manually. Group Owner - - Set your machine as the Group Owner. Push Button - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using the one-button push method. PIN Code - - Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using WPS with a PIN code. Device Information Device Name - View your machine's device name. SSID - View the Group Owner's SSID. When the machine is not connected, the LCD displays Not Connected. Status Information IP Address - View your machine's current IP Address. Status - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network status. Signal - View the current Wi-Fi Direct network signal strength. When your machine acts as Group Owner, the LCD always indicates a strong signal. E-mail I/F Enable - - Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on or off. Mail Address - - Enter the email address. (Up to 255 characters) Setup Server Setup Mail TX SMTP Server Enter the SMTP server name and address. Port Enter the SMTP port number. Auth. for SMTP Select the Security method for email notification. SSL/TLS Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication. Verify Cert. Verify the SMTP Server Certificate automatically. Sender Subject - View the subject. Size Limit Size Limit Limit the size of email documents. Maximum Size(MB) Web Connect Settings Web Based Mgmt Proxy Settings - Notification - Send notification messages. Proxy Connection - Change the Web connection settings. Address - Port - User Name - Password - - - Enable or disable Web Based Management. 612 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management. IPsec - - - IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services. We recommend contacting your network administrator before changing this setting. Global Detect Allow Detect - - Enable or disable Global Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user unintentionally connects to a global network. Reject Access - - Disable connections to the global network. - - - Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. Network Reset [Print Reports] [All Settings] > [Print Reports] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Address Book - Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book. User Settings - Print a list of your User settings. Printer Settings - Print a list of your Printer settings. Network Configuration - Print a list of your Network settings. Print File List - Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory. Drum Dot Print - Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet. WLAN Report - Print the wireless LAN connection results. (For wireless network models) [Machine Info.] [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Serial No. - Check your machine's serial number. Firmware Version Main Version Check your machine's firmware version. Security Version Firmware Update - Update your machine to the latest firmware. Firmware Auto Check - View firmware information on the Main Home screen. Page Counter Check the total number of pages the machine has printed. Total Copy Print Other Parts Life 1 Drum Display the remaining life of the drum unit. Fuser Display the remaining life of the fuser unit. Laser Unit Display the remaining life of the laser unit. 613 Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Parts Life 1 PF Kit MP Display the remaining life of PF Kit MP. PF Kit 1 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 1. PF Kit 2 2 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 2. PF Kit 3 2 Display the remaining life of PF Kit 3. 1 The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use. 2 Available if the Optional Tray(s) is installed. [Initial Setup] [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions Date & Time Date Add the date and time on the screen. Time Clock Type Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour). Auto Daylight Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time. Time Zone Reset Set your time zone. Machine Reset Restore all the machine settings that you have changed. Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings. Address Book Erase all stored email addresses. All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings. Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings. Local Language - Change your LCD language. (Available only for certain countries) Related Information • Settings and Features Tables 614 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables > Features Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Features Tables (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) Related Models: MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 >> Wired Network Setup >> Wi-Fi® Setup >> [Toner] >> [Admin Settings] >> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off) >> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On) >> [Copy] >> [Scan] >> [Shortcuts] >> [Secure Print] >> [Web] >> [Apps] >> [USB] >> [2 in 1 ID Copy] Wired Network Setup (Wired Network Setup) Level 3 Descriptions TCP/IP Change the TCP/IP settings. Ethernet Select the Ethernet link mode. Wired Status View the current wired status. MAC Address View the machine's MAC address. Set to Default 1 Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings. (For wireless network models) Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually. Wired Enable 1 (For wireless network models) 1 (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. Wi-Fi® Setup (Wi-Fi® Setup) For wireless network models Level 3 Descriptions Find Wi-Fi Network Configure your wireless network settings manually. TCP/IP 1 Change the TCP/IP settings. WPS/Push Button Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method. WPS/PIN Code 1 Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code. 615 Level 3 Descriptions WLAN Status 1 Display the wireless network connection status. MAC Address 1 Display your machine's MAC address. Set to Default 1 Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings. WLAN Enable 1 Turn the wireless interface on or off. 1 Available after a Wi-Fi® connection has been configured. NOTE (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. [Toner] [Toner] Level 2 Descriptions Toner Life View the approximate remaining toner life. Test Print Print a test page. Toner Cartridge Check View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine. [Admin Settings] [Admin Settings] Descriptions Level 2 Admin Settings Change the screen settings and restrict use of the machine. [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off) [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off) Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Redial / Pause - - - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or telephone number on the touchscreen, Redial changes to Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay while dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up addresses. Tel / R - - - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX. - - Search within the Address Book. Address Book (Search) 616 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Address Book Edit Add New Address Name Store Address Book numbers, set up Group numbers for Broadcasting, change and delete Address Book numbers. Setup Groups Name Change (Select Address) Delete (Select Address) (Select Address Book) Apply - Start sending a fax using the Address Book. Call History Outgoing Call (Select Outgoing Call) Apply Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. Fax Start - - - Send a fax. Options Fax Resolution - - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes. Contrast - - Adjust the contrast. 2-sided Fax - - Set the 2-sided scanning format. Glass Scan Size - - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the document. Broadcasting Add Number Send the same fax message to more than one fax number. Address Add/ Delete Edit (For automatic 2sided scanning models) Add Number Add from Address book Search in Address book Preview - - Preview a fax message before you send it. Delayed Fax Delayed Fax - Set Time - Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent. - - Send a fax without using the memory. Coverpage Setup Coverpage Setup - Set the machine to automatically send a preprogrammed cover page. Coverpage Note - Total Pages - - - Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas. Set New Default - - Save your settings as the default. Factory Reset - - Restore all settings back to the factory settings. - - - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Real Time TX Overseas Mode Save as Shortcut 617 [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On) [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On) Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or telephone number on the touchscreen, Redial changes to Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay while dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up addresses. Tel / R - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX. Address Book - Select the address of the recipient from the address book. Call History - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. Fax Start - Send a fax. Options - Select your settings. Save as Shortcut - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Print/Delete Print All(New Faxes) Print the new received faxes. Print All(Old Faxes) Print the old received faxes. Delete All(New Faxes) Delete the new received faxes. Delete All(Old Faxes) Delete the old received faxes. Sending Faxes Redial / Pause Received Faxes Address Book - - Select the address of the recipient from the address book. Call History - - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. [Copy] [Copy] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Start - - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy. ID - - Make a copy of your ID card. Interrupt - - Interrupt a print job with a copy job. Start Set the preset copy settings for copying a receipt. > (more Copy options) Receipt ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) 618 Level 3 Level 4 > (more Copy options) Receipt Normal Level 5 Descriptions Options Set the preset copy settings for copying a receipt. Start Set the preset copy settings for a Normal copy. ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) Options 2sided(1⇒2) Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided (1⇒2). ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) Options 2sided(2⇒2) Start Set the preset copy settings of 2-sided (2⇒2). ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) Options 2in1(ID) Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1(ID). ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) Options 2in1 Start Set the preset copy settings of 2in1. ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) Options Paper Save Start Set the preset copy settings for Paper Save. ID Interrupt Save as Shortcut > (more Copy options) Options Options Quality - Select the Copy resolution for your document type. Tray Use - Select the paper tray you want to use. Enlarge/Reduce 100% - 619 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Options Enlarge/Reduce Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy. Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy. Auto Adjusts the copy size to fit on the paper size you have set. Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio. Density - Adjust the density. 2-sided Copy Layout Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select flip on long edge or flip on short edge. 2-sided Copy Page Layout - Select a page layout option when you make 2sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document. Contrast - Adjust the contrast. Stack/Sort - Select to stack or sort multiple copies. 2in1/1in1 - If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the layout options. Page Layout - Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 copies. Auto Deskew - Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically. - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Save as Shortcut - [Scan] [Scan] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to USB Scan Actions - - Options 2-sided Scan - Scan documents to a USB flash drive. (For automatic 2sided scanning models) Colour Setting - Resolution - File Type - Document Size - Brightness - Contrast - File Name - File Name Style - Auto Deskew - Skip Blank Page - Skip Blank Page Sensitivity - Remove Background Colour - Margin Settings (available only for certain models) - 620 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to USB Options Document Separation Document Separation Scan documents to a USB flash drive. Copies Number of Pages B&W TIFF Compress - Set New Default - Factory Reset - Save as Shortcut - - Start - - to My E-mail - - - Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email address. to My Folder - - - Send scanned data to your folder in the CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. to PC to File Scan Actions - (Select USB or PC) Options Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer. Save as Shortcut Start to OCR Scan Actions - (Select USB or PC) Options Convert your scanned document to an editable text file. Save as Shortcut Start to Image Scan Actions - (Select USB or PC) Options Scan photos or graphics into your graphics applications. Save as Shortcut Start to E-mail Scan Actions - (Select USB or PC) Options Send a scanned document as an email attachment. Save as Shortcut Start to Mobile App to E-mail Server Scan Actions - - (Select Profile name) - - Save as Shortcut - Start - Scan Actions - - Cancel - - Manual - Address Book - Scan documents to a mobile application. Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email server. 621 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 to E-mail Server Address Book (Search) Edit - (Select Address Book) - Destinations - Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Destinations (Select Address) - Scan Actions - - (Select Profile name) Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Scan Actions - - (Select Profile name) Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Scan Actions - - (Select Profile name) Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Next to FTP/SFTP to Network to SharePoint Level 6 Descriptions Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email server. Send scanned data via FTP/ SFTP. Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. Send scanned data via a SharePoint server. to Web - - - Upload the scanned data to an Internet service. WS Scan Scan Actions - - (Appears when you install a Web Services Scanner, which is displayed in your computer's Network explorer.) Scan - - Scan data using the Web Service protocol. Scan for Email - - Scan for Fax - - Scan for Print - - [Shortcuts] [Shortcuts] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Add Shortcut Copy - Select the settings you want. Fax - Select the settings you want. Scan to File Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your computer. to OCR Convert your scanned document to an editable text file. 622 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Add Shortcut Scan to Image Scan a colour picture into your graphics application. to USB Scan documents to a USB flash drive. to E-mail Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your email application. to E-mail Server Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the email address you want. to Network Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. to FTP/SFTP Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP. to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint server. - Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. Web Web services may have been added and service names may have been changed by the provider since this document was published. These lists appears when each Shortcut name is pressed for two seconds. Apps - Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. Rename - Change the shortcut name. Edit - Change the shortcut settings. Delete - Delete the shortcut. Register Card/NFC - Assign a shortcut to an ID card. Delete Card/NFC - Remove a shortcut from an ID card. [Secure Print] [Secure Print] Descriptions Level 2 Secure Print You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password. Active only when the machine has secure print data. [Web] [Web] Level 2 Descriptions Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. [Apps] [Apps] Level 2 Descriptions Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. 623 [USB] [USB] Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions USB Scan documents to a USB flash drive. Scan to USB Direct Print Print the data directly from a USB flash drive. [2 in 1 ID Copy] [2 in 1 ID Copy] Level 2 Descriptions 2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page. Related Information • Settings and Features Tables 624 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables > Features Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Features Tables (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN >> Wi-Fi® Setup >> [Toner] >> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off) >> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On) >> [Copy] >> [Scan] >> [Shortcuts] >> [Secure Print] >> [Web] >> [Apps] >> [USB] >> [2 in 1 ID Copy] Wi-Fi® Setup (Wi-Fi® Setup) (For wireless network models) Level 3 Descriptions Find Wi-Fi Network Configure your wireless network settings manually. TCP/IP 1 Change the TCP/IP settings. WPS/Push Button Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method. WPS/PIN Code 1 Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code. WLAN Status 1 Display the wireless network connection status. MAC Address 1 Display your machine's MAC address. Set to Default 1 Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings. WLAN Enable 1 Turn the wireless interface on or off. 1 Available after a Wi-Fi® connection has been configured. [Toner] [Toner] Level 2 Descriptions Toner Life View the approximate remaining toner life. Test Print Print a test page. Toner Cartridge Check View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine. 625 [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off) [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off) Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Redial / Pause - - - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or telephone number on the touchscreen, Redial changes to Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay while dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up addresses. Tel / R - - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX. - - Search within the Address Book. Add New Address Name Store Address Book numbers, set up Group numbers for Broadcasting, change and delete Address Book numbers. Setup Groups Name Change (Select Address) Delete (Select Address) Apply - Start sending a fax using the Address Book. - - Redial the last number you dialled. (Select Outgoing Call) Apply Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. - Address Book (Search) Edit (Select Address Book) Call History Redial Outgoing Call Fax Start Options Address Add/ Delete Edit - - - Send a fax. Fax Resolution - - Set the resolution for outgoing faxes. Contrast - - Adjust the contrast. 2-sided Fax - - Set the 2-sided scanning format. Glass Scan Size - - Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the document. Broadcasting Add Number Send the same fax message to more than one fax number. (For automatic 2sided scanning models) Add Number Add from Address book Search in Address book 626 Level 3 Options Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions Preview - - Preview a fax message before you send it. Delayed Fax Delayed Fax - Set Time - Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent. - - Send a fax without using the memory. Coverpage Setup Coverpage Setup - Set the machine to automatically send a preprogrammed cover page. Coverpage Note - Total Pages - Overseas Mode - - Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas. Call History - - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. Address Book - - Select the address of the recipient from the address book. Set New Default - - Save your settings as the default. Factory Reset - - Restore all settings back to the factory settings. - - - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Real Time TX Save as Shortcut [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On) [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On) Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions - Redial the last number called. When you are entering a fax or telephone number on the touchscreen, Redial changes to Pause on the LCD. Press Pause when you need a delay while dialling numbers, such as access codes and credit card numbers. You can also store a pause when you set up addresses. Tel / R - Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX. Address Book - Select the address of the recipient from the address book. Call History - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. Fax Start - Send a fax. - Select your settings. Save as Shortcut - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Print/Delete Print All(New Faxes) Print the new received faxes. Print All(Old Faxes) Print the old received faxes. Sending Faxes Redial / Pause Options Received Faxes 627 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Received Faxes Print/Delete Delete All(New Faxes) Delete the new received faxes. Delete All(Old Faxes) Delete the old received faxes. Address Book - - Select the address of the recipient from the address book. Call History - - Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it. [Copy] [Copy] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Start - - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy. ID - - Make a copy of your ID card. Quality - Select the Copy resolution for your document type. Tray Use - Select the paper tray you want to use. Enlarge/Reduce 100% - Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy. Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy. Auto Adjusts the copy size to fit on the paper size you have set. Options Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio. Density - Adjust the density. 2-sided Copy Layout Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select flip on long edge or flip on short edge. 2-sided Copy Page Layout - Select a page layout option when you make 2sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document. Contrast - Adjust the contrast. Stack/Sort - Select to stack or sort multiple copies. 2in1/1in1 - If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the layout options. Page Layout - Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 copies. Auto Deskew - Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically. - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Save as Shortcut - [Scan] [Scan] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to USB Other Scan to Actions - - Scan documents to a USB flash drive. 2-sided Scan - Options 628 Level 3 Level 4 to USB Options Level 5 Level 6 (For automatic 2sided scanning models) Descriptions Scan documents to a USB flash drive. Colour Setting - Resolution - File Type - Document Size - Brightness - Contrast - File Name - File Name Style - File Size - Auto Deskew - Skip Blank Page - Skip Blank Page Sensitivity - Remove Background Colour - Margin Settings (available only for certain models) - Document Separation Document Separation Copies Number of Pages B&W TIFF Compress - Set New Default - Factory Reset - Save as Shortcut - - Start - - to My E-mail - - - Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email address. to My Folder - - - Send scanned data to your folder in the CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. to PC to File Other Scan to Actions - Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer. (Select USB or PC) Options Save as Shortcut Start 629 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to PC to OCR Other Scan to Actions - Convert your scanned document to an editable text file. (Select USB or PC) Options Save as Shortcut Start to Image Other Scan to Actions - (Select USB or PC) Scan photos or graphics into your graphics applications. Options Save as Shortcut Start to E-mail Other Scan to Actions - (Select USB or PC) Send a scanned document as an email attachment. Options Save as Shortcut Start to Mobile App Other Scan to Actions - (Select Profile name) to E-mail Server Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Other Scan to Actions - - Cancel - - Manual - - Address Book Scan documents to a mobile application. Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email server. (Search) Next to FTP/SFTP Edit - (Select Address Book) - Destinations - Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Destinations (Select Address) - Other Scan to Actions - - (Select Profile name) Options Send scanned data via FTP/ SFTP. - 630 Level 3 Level 4 to FTP/SFTP (Select Profile name) Save as Shortcut to Network Level 5 Other Scan to Actions Other Scan to Actions Descriptions - Send scanned data via FTP/ SFTP. Start - - - (Select Profile name) to SharePoint Level 6 Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - - - (Select Profile name) Options Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. Send scanned data via a SharePoint server. - Save as Shortcut - Start - to Web - - - Upload the scanned data to an Internet service. WS Scan Other Scan to Actions - - Scan data using the Web Service protocol. - - - - - - - - (Appears when you install a Web Scan Services Scanner, which is displayed in Scan for E-mail your computer's Scan for Fax Network explorer.) Scan for Print [Shortcuts] [Shortcuts] Level 3 Add Shortcut Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Copy - Select the settings you want. Fax - Select the settings you want. Scan to File Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your computer. to OCR Convert your scanned document to an editable text file. to Image Scan a colour picture into your graphics application. to USB Scan documents to a USB flash drive. to E-mail Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your email application. to E-mail Server Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the email address you want. to Network Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. to FTP/SFTP Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP. to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint server. 631 Level 3 Add Shortcut Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Web - Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. Web services may have been added and service names may have been changed by the provider since this document was published. Apps - Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. - Change the shortcut name. - Change the shortcut settings. - Delete the shortcut. Register Card/NFC - Assign a shortcut to an ID card. Delete Card/NFC - Remove a shortcut from an ID card. These lists appears when each Rename Shortcut name is pressed for Edit two seconds. Delete [Secure Print] [Secure Print] Descriptions Level 2 Secure Print You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password. Active only when the machine has secure print data. [Web] [Web] Level 2 Descriptions Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. [Apps] [Apps] Level 2 Descriptions Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. [USB] [USB] Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions USB Scan documents to a USB flash drive. Scan to USB Direct Print Print the data directly from a USB flash drive. 632 [2 in 1 ID Copy] [2 in 1 ID Copy] Level 2 Descriptions 2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page. Related Information • Settings and Features Tables 633 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Settings and Features Tables > Features Tables (DCP-L5510DW) Features Tables (DCP-L5510DW) Related Models: DCP-L5510DW >> Wi-Fi® Setup >> [Toner] >> [Copy] >> [Scan] >> [Shortcuts] >> [Secure Print] >> [Web] >> [Apps] >> [USB] >> [2 in 1 ID Copy] Wi-Fi® Setup (Wi-Fi® Setup) (For wireless network models) Level 3 Descriptions Find Wi-Fi Network Configure your wireless network settings manually. TCP/IP 1 Change the TCP/IP settings. WPS/Push Button Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method. WPS/PIN Code 1 Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code. WLAN Status 1 Display the wireless network connection status. MAC Address 1 Display your machine's MAC address. Set to Default 1 Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings. WLAN Enable 1 Turn the wireless interface on or off. 1 Available after a Wi-Fi® connection has been configured. [Toner] [Toner] Level 2 Descriptions Toner Life View the approximate remaining toner life. Test Print Print a test page. Toner Cartridge Check View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine. 634 [Copy] [Copy] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Start - - Make a monochrome or greyscale copy. ID - - Make a copy of your ID card. Quality - Select the Copy resolution for your document type. Tray Use - Select the paper tray you want to use. Enlarge/Reduce 100% - Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy. Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy. Auto Adjusts the copy size to fit on the paper size you have set. Options Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio. Density - Adjust the density. 2-sided Copy Layout Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select flip on long edge or flip on short edge. 2-sided Copy Page Layout - Select a page layout option when you make 2sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document. Contrast - Adjust the contrast. Stack/Sort - Select to stack or sort multiple copies. 2in1/1in1 - If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the layout options. Page Layout - Make N in 1 and 2 in 1 copies. Auto Deskew - Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically. - Save the current settings as a shortcut. Save as Shortcut - [Scan] [Scan] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to USB Other Scan to Actions - - Scan documents to a USB flash drive. 2-sided Scan - Options (For automatic 2sided scanning models) Colour Setting - Resolution - File Type - Document Size - Brightness - Contrast - File Name - 635 Level 3 Level 4 to USB Options Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions File Name Style - File Size - Scan documents to a USB flash drive. Auto Deskew - Skip Blank Page - Skip Blank Page Sensitivity - Remove Background Colour - Margin Settings (available only for certain models) - Document Separation Document Separation Copies Number of Pages B&W TIFF Compress - Set New Default - Factory Reset - Save as Shortcut - - Start - - to My E-mail - - - Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email address. to My Folder - - - Send scanned data to your folder in the CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. to PC to File Other Scan to Actions - Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer. (Select USB or PC) Options Save as Shortcut Start to OCR Other Scan to Actions - (Select USB or PC) Convert your scanned document to an editable text file. Options Save as Shortcut Start to Image Other Scan to Actions (Select USB or PC) - Scan photos or graphics into your graphics applications. Options 636 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to PC to Image (Select USB or PC) Save as Shortcut Scan photos or graphics into your graphics applications. Start to E-mail Other Scan to Actions - (Select USB or PC) Send a scanned document as an email attachment. Options Save as Shortcut Start to Mobile App Other Scan to Actions - (Select Profile name) to E-mail Server Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - Other Scan to Actions - - Cancel - - Manual - - Address Book Scan documents to a mobile application. Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email server. (Search) Next Edit - (Select Address Book) - Destinations - Preview - Options to FTP/SFTP Save as Shortcut - Start - Destinations (Select Address) - Other Scan to Actions - - (Select Profile name) to Network - Other Scan to Actions (Select Profile name) Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - - Options Send scanned data via FTP/ SFTP. - Save as Shortcut - Start - Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. 637 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Descriptions to SharePoint Other Scan to Actions - - Send scanned data via a SharePoint server. (Select Profile name) Options - Save as Shortcut - Start - to Web - - - Upload the scanned data to an Internet service. WS Scan Other Scan to Actions - - Scan data using the Web Service protocol. - - - - - - - - (Appears when you install a Web Scan Services Scanner, which is displayed in Scan for E-mail your computer's Scan for Fax Network explorer.) Scan for Print [Shortcuts] [Shortcuts] Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions Add Shortcut Copy - Select the settings you want. Scan to File Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your computer. to OCR Convert your scanned document to an editable text file. to Image Scan a colour picture into your graphics application. to USB Scan documents to a USB flash drive. to E-mail Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your email application. to E-mail Server Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the email address you want. to Network Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet. to FTP/SFTP Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP. to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint server. - Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. Web Web services may have been added and service names may have been changed by the provider since this document was published. These lists appears when each Shortcut name is pressed for two seconds. Apps - Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. Rename - Change the shortcut name. Edit - Change the shortcut settings. Delete - Delete the shortcut. Register Card/NFC - Assign a shortcut to an ID card. 638 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions These lists appears when each Shortcut name is pressed for two seconds. Delete Card/NFC - Remove a shortcut from an ID card. [Secure Print] [Secure Print] Level 2 Descriptions Secure Print You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password. Active only when the machine has secure print data. [Web] [Web] Level 2 Descriptions Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. [Apps] [Apps] Level 2 Descriptions Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. [USB] [USB] Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions USB Scan documents to a USB flash drive. Scan to USB Direct Print Print the data directly from a USB flash drive. [2 in 1 ID Copy] [2 in 1 ID Copy] Level 2 Descriptions 2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page. Related Information • Settings and Features Tables 639 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS). • What is Web Based Management? • Access Web Based Management • Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management • Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management 640 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > What is Web Based Management? What is Web Based Management? Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS). • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS • Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. • Make sure your machine is On and connected to the same network as your computer, and that your network supports the TCP/IP protocol. The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above. Related Information • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management 641 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Access Web Based Management Access Web Based Management • We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers: - Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Windows - Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome™ for Mac - Google Chrome™ for Android™ - Safari and Google Chrome™ for iOS • Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use. • We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based Management. • When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning dialog box. To avoid displaying the warning dialog box, you can install a self-signed certificate to use SSL/TLS communication. For more information, see Related Information. • The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access. You can also find the default password in the Network Configuration Report. >> Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser >> Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) >> Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows) Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click . You can now change the machine's settings. Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac) 1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan. • Windows Launch (Brother iPrint&Scan). 642 • Mac In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications, and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears. 2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model name from the list. Click OK. 3. Click (Machine Settings). 4. Click All Settings. The Web Based Management page appears. 5. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 6. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click . You can now change the machine's settings. You can also access Web Based Management from Brother Mobile Connect for mobile devices. Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows) 1. Launch (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). 2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Machine Settings. The Web Based Management page appears. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click . You can now change the machine's settings. If you change the protocol settings, you must restart the machine after clicking Submit to activate the configuration. After configuring the settings, click Logout. Related Information • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management Related Topics: • Print the Network Configuration Report • Create a Self-signed Certificate • Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrator • Use SSL/TLS 643 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. Do one of the following: • If you have previously set your own password, type it, and then click Login. • If you have not previously set your own password, type the default login password, and then click Login. 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Login Password. • The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". • Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. To change the password, type your current password in the Enter Old Password field. 6. Following the on-screen Login Password guidelines, type your new password in the Enter New Password field. 7. Retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field. 8. Click Submit. You can also change the lockout settings in the Login Password menu. Related Information • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management 644 Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management Related Models: MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 • We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based Management. • When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning dialog box. 1. Start your web browser. 2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address). For example: https://192.168.1.2 • If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address. For example: https://SharedPrinter • If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name. For example: https://brn123456abcdef • The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report. 3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login. The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked "Pwd". 4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book. Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen. 5. Add or update the Address Book information as needed. 6. Click Submit. Related Information • Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management 645 Home > Appendix Appendix • Specifications • Supplies • Environmental and Compliance Information • Accessories • Brother Help and Customer Support 646 Home > Appendix > Specifications Specifications >> General Specifications >> Document Size Specification >> Print Media Specifications >> Fax Specifications >> Copy Specification >> Scanner Specifications >> Printer Specifications >> Interface Specifications >> Direct Print Feature Specifications >> Supported Protocols and Security Features >> Computer Requirements Specifications General Specifications Printer Type Laser Print Method Electrophotographic Laser Printer Memory Capacity Standard • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW) 512 MB • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 2 GB Machine display • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) 3.5 in. TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 70.08 x 52.56 mm 1 • (MFC-L6710DW) 5.0 in. TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 108.00 x 64.8 mm 1 • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 7.0 in. TFT Colour touchscreen LCD 153.84 x 85.63 mm 1 Power Source Power Consumption (Average) 220 V to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz Peak Approximately 1,280 W Printing 2 • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) Approximately 670 W at 25°C Approximately 710 W at 25°C Printing Approximately 430 W at 25°C (Quiet Mode) 2 Copying 2 • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) Approximately 680 W at 25°C • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) Approximately 710 W at 25°C Copying Approximately 430 W at 25°C (Quiet Mode) 2 647 Power Consumption (Average) Ready 2 Approximately 31 W at 25°C Sleep 2 • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) Approximately 5.9 W • (MFC-L6710DW) Approximately 6.0 W • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Approximately 6.7 W Deep Sleep 2 • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) Approximately 0.6 W • (MFC-L6710DW) Approximately 0.8 W • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Approximately 0.7 W Power Off 3 4 Approximately 0.05 W Dimensions Unit: mm (Typical outline view) • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) * : 417 ** : 448 *** : 461 • (MFC-L6710DW) * : 495 ** : 518 *** : 473 • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) * : 495 ** : 518 *** : 495 Weight (with supplies) • (MFC-L5710DW) 16.4 kg • (MFC-L5710DN) 16.6 kg • (DCP-L5510DW) 16.9 kg • (MFC-L5715DN) 17.0 kg • (MFC-L6710DW) 19.3 kg • (MFC-L6910DN) 20.2 kg • (MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 20.0 kg 648 Noise Level Sound Pressure 5 Printing LpAm = 54.0 dB (A) Printing LpAm = 50 dB (A) (Quiet Mode) Sound Power Ready LpAm = Up to 35.0 dB (A) Printing 5 • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) LWAc = 7.02 B (A) • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) LWAc = 7.06 B (A) Printing LWAc = 6.54 B (A) (Quiet Mode) Ready Temperature Humidity LWAc = Up to 4.9 B (A) Operating From 10°C to 32.5°C Storage From 0°C to 40°C Operating 20% to 80% (without condensation) Storage 35% to 85% (without condensation) Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) Up to 50 sheets • (MFC-L6710DW) Up to 70 sheets • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Up to 80 sheets For best results we recommend: • Temperature: 20°C to 30°C • Humidity: 50% to 70% • Paper: 80 g/m2 1 Measured diagonally. 2 Measured when the machine is connected using the same network connection as the ENERGY STAR Ver. 3.1 test method. 3 Measured according to IEC 62301 Edition 2.0. 4 Power consumption varies slightly depending on the usage environment. 5 Measured in accordance with the method described in ISO 7779. Document Size Specification Document Size ADF Width 105 mm to 215.9 mm ADF Length 147.3 mm to 355.6 mm Scanner Glass Width Maximum 216 mm Scanner Glass Length • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Maximum 300 mm • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Maximum 355.6 mm Print Media Specifications Paper Input Paper Tray (Standard) Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper, Thick Paper 649 Paper Input Paper Tray Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), A5, A5 (Long Edge), A6, Executive, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal, Folio, 16K (195x270 mm), A4 Short (270mm Paper) Paper Weight 60 to 163 g/m2 1 Maximum Paper Capacity • (Standard) (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN) Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910) Up to 520 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper Multi-Purpose Tray (MP tray) Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Thicker Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond, Label, Envelope, Env.Thin, Env.Thick Paper Size • Width: 69.8 to 215.9 mm • Length: 127 to 355.6 mm • Envelope: COM-10, DL, C5, Monarch Paper Tray 2, 3 Paper Weight 60 to 230 g/m2 1 Maximum Paper Capacity • Up to 100 Sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper • Envelope: Up to 11 mm thick Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper, Thick Paper Paper Size A4, Letter, B5 (JIS), A5, Executive, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal, Folio, 16K (195x270 mm), A4 Short (270mm Paper) Paper Weight 60 to 120 g/m2 1 Maximum Paper Capacity • (Optional) 2 LT-5505 Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper • LT-6505 Up to 520 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper Paper Output 3 Face Down Output Tray • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW) Up to 150 sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper (face-down delivery to the face-down output paper tray) • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Up to 250 Sheets of 80 g/m2 Plain Paper (face down delivery to the face down output paper tray) Face Up Output Tray • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW) One sheet (face up delivery to the face up output tray) • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Up to 10 sheets (face up delivery to the face up output tray) 2-sided Automatic 2-sided Printing Paper Type Plain Paper, Letterhead, Coloured Paper, Thin Paper, Recycled Paper Paper Size A4 Paper Weight 60 to 105 g/m2 650 1 For paper of 105 g/m2 and above, open the back cover to use the face up output tray. 2 Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to two Lower Trays in any combination. 3 For labels, we recommend removing the printed sheets from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the possibility of smudging. Fax Specifications NOTE This feature is available for MFC models. Compatibility ITU-T Super Group 3 Coding System MH / MR / MMR / JBIG Modem Speed 33,600 bps (with Automatic Fallback) 2-sided Print Receiving Yes Automatic 2-sided Sending (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Yes (from the ADF) Scanning Width Maximum 208 mm Printing Width Maximum 207.4 mm Greyscale 8 bit / 256 levels Resolution Horizontal 203 dpi Vertical Standard: 98 dpi Fine: 196 dpi Super fine: 392 dpi Photo: 196 dpi Address Book 1 300 Locations Groups 1 Up to 20 Broadcasting 350 Locations Automatic Redial 3 times at 5-minute intervals Memory Transmission Up to 500 pages 2 Out of Paper Reception Up to 500 pages 2 1 Available for DCP and MFC models 2 ‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T TestChart Document No.1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Copy Specification Copy Width Maximum 210 mm Automatic 2-sided Copy (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Yes (from the ADF) Sort Copy Yes Stack Copy Up to 999 pages Enlarge/Reduce 25 to 400% (in increments of 1%) Resolution Maximum 1200 x 600 dpi First Copy Out Time 1 Less than 8.7 seconds at 23°C 1 From Ready Mode and standard tray. 651 Scanner Specifications Colour / Black Yes / Yes TWAIN Compliant Yes (Windows 10 / Windows 11) WIA Compliant Yes (Windows 10 / Windows 11) Colour Depth Grey Scale Resolution 1 Scanning Width • 48 bit colour Processing (Input) • 24 bit colour Processing (Output) • 16 bit colour Processing (Input) • 8 bit colour Processing (Output) • Up to 19200 x 19200 dpi (interpolated) • Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi (from Scanner Glass) • Up to 600 x 600 dpi (from the ADF) Maximum 210 mm Automatic 2-sided Scanning (MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Yes (from the ADF) 1 Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows 10 and Windows 11 (resolution up to 19200 × 19200 dpi can be selected by using the scanner utility) Printer Specifications Automatic 2-sided Print Yes Emulation PCL6, BR-Script3, IBM Proprinter XL, Epson FX-850, PDF version1.7, XPS version 1.0 Resolution Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi Print Speed 1 1-sided Print 2 3 • (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN) Up to 50 pages/minute (Letter size) Up to 48 pages/minute (A4 size) • (MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Up to 52 pages/minute (Letter size) Up to 50 pages/minute (A4 size) 2-sided Print Up to 24 sides/minute (Up to 12 sheets/minute) (Letter size) Up to 24 sides/minute (Up to 12 sheets/minute) (A4 size) First Print Time 4 5 6 Less than 6.7 seconds at 23°C 1 The print speed may be slower when the machine is connected by wireless LAN. 2 The print speeds of "1-sided Print" were measured in accordance with ISO/IEC 24734. 3 This speed is based on 1-sided printing. If your model’s default print setting is "2-sided", change to "1-sided" for these results. 4 Printing from Ready mode and standard tray. 5 Length of time from when the machine is started until paper output is complete (except when the machine is turned on or when an error is fixed) 6 This applies when printing on A4- or Letter-size paper from the standard tray. It could be longer however, depending on the paper size and the amount of print data. Interface Specifications USB • Type: USB Type-B receptacle Version: USB 2.0 High-Speed 1 2 Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no more than 2 metres long. 652 • Type: USB Type-A receptacle (Front) 3 • (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Type: USB Type-A receptacle (Rear) 3 Version: USB 2.0 High-Speed Connect a USB flash drive for USB Storage Print. LAN 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T 4 Wireless LAN (DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) 5 IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (Infrastructure Mode) IEEE 802.11a/g/n (Wi-Fi Direct®) NFC 6 (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Yes 1 Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB 1.1 interface. 2 Third party USB hub devices are not supported. 3 USB host port 4 Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable. 5 (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) The wireless network connection can be used only when the optional Wireless Module is installed. 6 When you connect an external IC card reader, use a HID class driver supported device. Direct Print Feature Specifications Compatibility PDF version1.7, JPEG, Exif+JPEG, PRN (created by the machine's own printer driver), TIFF (scanned by Brother models), XPS version 1.0 Interface USB direct interface: Front x1, Rear x1 (MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910) Supported Protocols and Security Features Supported protocols and security features may differ depending the models. Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Protocols (IPv4) ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, POP3, SMTP Client, IPP/IPPS, FTP Client and Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, ICMP, Web Services (Print/Scan), SNTP Client, LDAP, IMAP4, Syslog Protocols (IPv6) NDP, RA, DNS resolver, mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS, POP3, SMTP Client, FTP Client and Server, CIFS Client, TELNET Server, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, HTTP/HTTPS server, TFTP client and server, ICMPv6, SNTP Client, LDAP, Web Services (Print/Scan), IMAP4, Syslog Network Security (Wired) APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP, FTP, POP3, IMAP4), SNMP v3 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAPFAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec Network Security (Wireless) APOP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPP, HTTP, SMTP, FTP, POP3, IMAP4), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos, IPsec Wireless Network Security WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA3-SAE (AES) (Wi-Fi Direct supports WPA2-PSK (AES) only) 653 Wireless Certification Wi-Fi Certification Mark License (WPA3™ - Enterprise, Personal), Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Identifier Mark License, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Wi-Fi Direct Computer Requirements Specifications Supported Operating Systems And Software Functions For the latest supported OS, go to your model's Supported OS page at support.brother.com/os. Computer Platform & Operating System Version Computer Interface USB 2 10Base-T/ 100BaseTX/ 1000BaseT Processor Wireless Hard Disk Space to Install 1 For Drivers 3 802.11a/b/ g/n For Applicatio ns (including Drivers) (Ethernet) Windows Operating System Windows 10 Home / 10 Pro / 10 Education / 10 Enterprise 4 5 Printing 32 bit (x86) or 64 bit (x64) processor PC Fax 6 Scanning Windows 11 Home / 11 Pro / 11 Education / 11 Enterprise 4 5 Windows Server 2012 80 MB 1.8 GB 64 bit (x64) processor Printing Printing Scanning 64 bit (x64) processor 80 MB Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows Server 2016 Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2022 Mac Operating System 7 macOS v11 Printing macOS v12 PC-Fax (Send) 6 8 macOS v13 Scanning Chrome OS Printing 64 bit processor N/A 500 MB N/A N/A N/A Scanning 1 An Internet connection is required to install the software if the installation disc is not supplied. 2 Third party USB ports are not supported. 3 For certain models, the optional Wireless Module is required. 4 For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables resolutions up to 19200 x 19200 dpi. 5 PaperPort™ 14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11. 6 PC-Fax supports black and white only. 7 macOS Disclaimer AirPrint capable: Printing or scanning via Mac requires using AirPrint. Mac drivers are not provided. 8 AirPrint only. For the latest driver updates, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com. All trademarks, brand and product names are the property of their respective companies. 654 Related Information • Appendix 655 Home > Appendix > Supplies Supplies When the time comes to replace supplies, such as the toner cartridge or drum unit, an error message will appear on your machine's control panel or in the Status Monitor. For more information about the supplies for your machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your local Brother dealer. • The toner cartridge and drum unit are two separate parts. • Supply product codes vary by country and region. Supply Supply Product Codes Approximate Life Applicable Models (Page Yield) Toner Cartridge Standard Toner: TN3600 (For all other countries except Israel) TN3601 (For Israel) High Yield Toner: TN3600XL (For all other countries except Israel) TN3601XL (For Israel) Super High Yield Toner: TN3600XXL (For all other countries except Israel) Approximately 3,000 pages DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/ 12 MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Approximately 6,000 pages DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 12 Approximately 11,000 pages 1 2 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Approximately 18,000 pages 1 2 MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Approximately 25,000 pages 1 2 MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/ MFC-EX910 TN3601XXL (For Israel) Ultra High Yield Toner: TN3610 (For all other countries except Israel) TN3611 (For Israel) Maximum Yield Toner: TN3610XL (For all other countries except Israel) TN3611XL (For Israel) Inbox Toner: (Supplied with your machine) Approximately 3,000 pages DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW 12 Approximately 6,000 pages MFC-L6710DW 12 Drum Unit DR3600 (For all other countries except Israel) DR3601 (For Israel) 1 Approximately 11,000 pages 1 2 MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6910DN Approximately 25,000 pages 1 2 MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 Approximately 75,000 pages 3 DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/ MFC-L5710DW/MFC-L5715DN/ MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages 656 2 The approximate cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. 3 Approximately 75,000 pages based on three pages per job and 45,000 pages based on one page per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages). The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size. Related Information • Appendix 657 Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information Environmental and Compliance Information • Information Regarding Recycled Paper • Availability of Service Parts • Chemical Substances (EU REACH) 658 Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information > Information Regarding Recycled Paper Information Regarding Recycled Paper • Recycled paper is of the same quality as paper made from original forest sources. Standards governing modern recycled paper ensure that it meets the highest quality requirements for different printing processes. The imaging equipment supplied by Brother is suitable for using with recycled paper meeting the EN 12281:2002 standard. • Purchasing recycled paper saves natural resources and promotes the circular economy. Paper is made using cellulose fibres from wood. Collecting and recycling paper extends the life of fibres over multiple life cycles, making the best use of the resources. • The recycled paper production process is shorter. The fibres have already been processed, so less water and energy, and fewer chemicals are used. • Paper recycling has the benefit of saving carbon by diverting paper products from alternative disposal routes such as landfill and incineration. Landfill waste emits methane gas, which has a powerful greenhouse effect. Related Information • Environmental and Compliance Information 659 Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information > Availability of Service Parts Availability of Service Parts Brother warrants that service parts will be available for at least seven years after the last date we place models on the market. To obtain service parts, contact your Brother supplier or dealer. Related Information • Environmental and Compliance Information 660 Home > Appendix > Environmental and Compliance Information > Chemical Substances (EU REACH) Chemical Substances (EU REACH) Information concerning chemical substances within our products required for the REACH Regulation can be found at https://www.brother.eu/reach. Related Information • Environmental and Compliance Information 661 Home > Appendix > Accessories Accessories Availability of accessories may vary depending on your country or region. For more information about the accessories for your machine, visit www.brother.com/original or contact your Brother dealer or Brother customer service. Product Codes Items Applicable Models LT-5505 Lower Tray (250 sheets) DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1 LT-6505 Lower Tray (520 sheets) DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 1 TT-4000 Tower Tray 2 MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 CH-1000 Card Reader Holder DCP-L5510DW/MFC-L5710DN/MFC-L5710DW/ MFC-L5715DN/MFC-L6710DW/MFC-L6910DN/ MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 NC-9110W Wireless Module MFC-L6910DN/MFC-L6915DN/MFC-EX910 (Available only for certain countries) 1 Maximum number of Lower Trays: Up to two Lower Trays in any combination. 2 Available only when the Lower Tray Unit is not installed to the machine. Related Information • Appendix 662 Home > Appendix > Brother Help and Customer Support Brother Help and Customer Support If you need help with using your Brother product, visit support.brother.com for FAQs and troubleshooting tips. You can also download the latest software, drivers and firmware, to improve the performance of your machine, and user documentation, to learn how to get the most from your Brother product. Further product and support information is available from your local Brother office website. Visit www.brother.com to find the contact details for your local Brother office and to register your new product. Related Information • Appendix 663 UK Version 0 ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Fast print speeds of up to 40ppm for increased efficiency
- Automatic document feeder for effortless scanning and copying of multi-page documents
- Wireless connectivity for seamless printing and scanning from mobile devices
- High-yield toner cartridges for cost-effective operation
- Compact design to fit comfortably in any workspace
- Versatile paper handling options for printing on a variety of media
- Advanced security features to protect sensitive information
- Easy-to-use touchscreen LCD for intuitive operation
- Energy-efficient design to minimize environmental impact
Frequently asked questions
The MFC-L5710DW has a paper tray capacity of 250 sheets and a multi-purpose tray capacity of 50 sheets.
Yes, the MFC-L5710DW supports wireless printing from mobile devices through the Brother Mobile Connect app.
The recommended monthly print volume for the MFC-L5710DW is between 250 and 2,500 pages.
No, the MFC-L5710DW does not support automatic duplex printing.
The MFC-L5710DW uses Brother TN-760 toner cartridges.